AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 13th Lesson Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 13th Lesson Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds and classify them into primary, secondary and tertiary amines.
i) (CH3)3CHNH2
ii) CH3 (CH2)2 NH2
iii) (CH3CH2)2 NCH3
Answer:
i) (CH3)3CHNH2 :
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 1
IUPAC name : 2 – methyl 2 – propananine ^ – NH
It is a 1° – amine

ii) CH3 (CH2)2 NH2:
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 2
IUPAC name : 1 – Propananine
It is a 1° – amine

iii) (CH3CH2)2 NCH3
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 3
IUPAC name : N – Elthyl N – Methyl Ethanamine
It is a 3° – amine

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Question 2.
Explain why ethylamine is more soluble in water, whereas aniline is not soluble.
Answer:
Elthyl amine is more soluble in water due to the presence of hydrogen bonding. Where are in case of aniline due to presence of bulky hydrocarbon part, the extent of hydrogen bonding is less and it is not soluble in water.

Question 3.
Why aniline does not undergo Friedel – Crafts reaction ?
Answer:
Aniline is a lewis base and AlCl3 is a Lewis acid. In Friedal Craft’s reaction both of these combined to form a complex
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 4
Lewis box Lewisacid Due to formation of complex the electrophilic substitution tendency decreases in aniline and it does not undergo these reaction.

Question 4.
Gabriel Phthalimide synthesis exclusively forms primary amines only. Explain.
Answer:
Gabriel Phthalinide synthesis exclusively forms primary amines only.
Reason : In this reaction primary amines are formed without the traces of 2° (or) 3° amines.

Question 5.
Arrange the following bases in decreasing order of pKb values. C2H5NH2, C6H5NHCH3, (C2H5)2 NH and C6H5NH2.
Answer:
The decreasing order of pKb values.of gives amines is
C6H5NH2 > C6H5NHCH3 > C2H5NH2 > (C2H5)2NH

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Question 6.
Arrange the following bases in increasing order their basic strength. Aniline. P – nitroaniline and P – toluidine.
Answer:
The increasing order of basic strength of given compounds is
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 5

Question 7.
Write equations for carbylamine reaction of any one aliphatic amine. [A.P.& T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
When Ethyl amine (1° – amine) reacts with chloro form in presence of alkali to form ethyl isocyanide.
CH3 – CH2 – NH2 + CHCl3 + 3KOH Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 6 CH3 – CH2 – NC + 3KCl + 3H2O

Question 8.
Give structures of A, B and C in the following reactions.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 7
Answer:
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 8
A – Phenyl Cyanide B – Benzoic acid C – Benzamide

Question 9.
Accomplish the following conversions. [Mar. 14]
i) Benzoic acid to benzamide
ii) Aniline to P – bromoaniline.
Answer:
Conversion of benzoic acid to benzamide
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 9

ii) Conversion of Aniline to P – bromo aniline
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 10

Question 10.
Why cannot aromatic primary amines be prepared by Gabriel phthalimide synthesis?
Answer:
Aromatic 1° – amines cannot be prepared by Gabriel phthalinide synthesis beczause aryl halides do not undergo nucleophilic substitution with the an ion formed by phthalinide.

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds.
i) CH3CH2NHCH2CH2CH3
ii) PhCH2CN
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 11
Answer:
i) CH3CH2NHCH2CH2CH3
N – Ethyl 1 – Propanamine

ii) PhCH2CN
Phenyl Ethane nitrile (Benzyl cyanide)

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 12

Question 2.
Give one chemical test to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds.
i) Methylamine and dimethylamine
ii) Aniline and N.Methylaniline .
iii) Ethylamine and aniline
Answer:
i) Methyl amine (1° – amine) and dimethyl amine (2° – amine) are distinguished by iso cyanide test (or) Carbylamine (est. Methyl amine responds to carbylamine reaction to produce methyl isocyanide where as dimethyl amine does not respond to the iso cyanide test
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 13
ii) Aniline (1° – amine) and N.methyl (2° – amine) aniline are distinguished, by carbylamine test (or) isocyanide test. Aniline responds to carbyl amine test to give foul smelling phenyl iso cyanide where as N – methyl aniline does not responds to carbyl amine Test.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 13
iii) Ethyl amine (1° – aliphafic amine) and aniline (1° – aromatic amine) are distinguished by Diazotisation reaction. Aniline under go diazotisation reaction to form benzene diazonium salt where as ethyl amine form highly unstable alkyl diazonium salt
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 15

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Question 3.
Account for the following :

  1. pKb of aniline is more then of methylamine.
  2. Reduction of alkylcyanide forms primary amine whereas alkyl isocyanide forms secondary amine.

Answer:

  1. In aniline there exist conjugation between the electron pair on nitrogen and benzene ring and is less available for protonation than in nethyl amine.
    ∴ pKb value of aniline is more than that of methylamine and aniline is less basic.
  2. The reduction of alkyl cyanides forms 1°- amines. In alkyl cyanides alkyl group is attached to carbon atom of cyanide, Where as in alkyl iso cyanides alkyl group is attached to nitrogen atom of isocyanide. So reduction of alkyl isocyanide forms 2°- amines.
    Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 16

Question 4.
How do you prepare the following ?
i) N, N-Dimethyl proponamine from ammonia
ii) Propanamine from chloroethane
Answer:
i) Preparation of N, N – Di nethyl propanamine from ammonia : Chloro propane reacts with ammonia followed by the reaction of methylchloride to form N, N – Di methyl propananine.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 17

ii) Preparation of propanamine from chloroethane : Chloro ethane reacts with KCN followed by the reduction forms propanamine
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 18

Question 5.
Compare the basicity of the following in gaseous and in a queous state and arrange them in increasing order of basicity.
Answer:
Givein compounds CH3NH2, (CH3)2NH, (CH3)3N and NH3.
In the above compounds methly substituted ammonium ion gets stabilised due to dispersal of the positive charge by the +1 effect of the methyl group. Hence methyl amines are stronger bases than ammonia. Basic nature of amines increase with increase of methyl groups. This trend is followed in gaseous phase.
(CH3)3 N > (CH3)2 NH > CH3 NH2 > NH3
In the aqueous phase the substituted ammonium cations get stabilised not only by electron releasing effect of the alkyl group but also by solvation with water molecules. Due to steric hinderance the basic strength of methyl amines in the aqueous state changed as follows
(CH3)2 NH > CH3 NH2 > (CH3)3 N > NH3

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Question 6.
How do you carryout the following conversions?
i) N – Ethylamine to N, N – Diethyl propanamine
ii) Aniline to Benzene suiphonamide
Answer:
Conversion of
i) N – Ethyl amine to N, N – Diethyl propanamine Ethyl amine reacts with ethyl chloride and propyl chloride to from N N – Di ethyl propanamine.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 19
ii) Conversion of Aniline to Benzene sulphonamide : Aniline reacts with benzene sulphonyl chloride to form N – Phenyl benzene suiphonamide.
C6H5NH2 + C6H5SO2Cl → C6H5NHSO2 C6H5 + HCl Phenyl benzene sulphonamide

Question 7.
Explain with a suitable example how benzene sulphonylchioride can distinguish primary secondary and tertiary amines.
Answer:
Benzene suiphonyl chloride is called Hinsbergs reagent. This is used to distinguish the 1°, 2°,. 3° – amines.
— with le – amine: Benzene suiphonyl chloride reacts with 1° amine and produce N – Alkyl benzene sulphonamide which is soluble in alkali.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 20
—, with 2° – amine: Benzene suiphonyl chloride reacts with 2° – amine and produce N, N – DiaLkyl benzene sulphonamide which is insoluble in alkali
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 21
—, with 3° – amine : Benzene sulphonyl chloride does not react with benzene sulphonyl chloride.

Question 8.
Write the reactions of
i) aromatic and
ii) aliphatic primaiy amines with nitrous acid.
Answer:
i) Reaction of aromatic 1° – amine with nitrous acid : Aromatic 1° – amine react with , nitrous acid at low temperature (0 – 5°C) to form diazonium salts.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 22
ii) Reaction of Aliphatic 1° – amine with nitrous acid : Aliphatic 1° – amine react with nitrous acid to form highly unstable diazonium salts which gives nitrogen gas and alcohols after decomposition.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 23

Question 9.
Explain why amines are less acidic than alcohols of comaparable molecular masses.
Answer:
Amines are less acidic than alcohols of comparable molecular massey
Explaination : In alcohols the O – H bond is more polar than N – H bond of amines. Hence Amines releates H+ ion with more difficulty as compared to alcohol.

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Question 10.
How do you prepare Ethyl cyanide and Ethyl isocyanide from a common alkylhalide ?
Answer:
Preparation of ethyl cyanide : Ethyl chloride reacts with aq. Ethanolic KCN to form Ethyl cyanide as a major product
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 24
Preparation of Ethyl isocyanide : Ethyl chloride reacts with aq. Ethanolic AgCN to form Ethyl iso cyanide as a major product
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 25

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
An aromatic compound A’ on treatment with aqueous ammonia and heating forms compound B which on heating with Br2 and KQH forms compound ‘C’ of molecular formula C6H7N. Write the structures and IUPAC names of compounds A, B and C.
Answer:
Given that an aromatic compound A on treatment with aq. NH3 and heating forms compound ‘B’. Which on heating with Br2 and KOH forms compound ‘C’ of molecular formula C6H7N.
1. From the above information ‘B is amide and ‘C’ is amine
2. Molecular formula of ‘C’ is C6H7N, So ‘C’ is Amiine (C6H5NH2)
3. Compound A on treatment with aq. NH3 forms B.
So ‘A’ is Benzoic acid (C6H5 – COOH)
and B’ is Benzamide (C6H5 – CONH2)
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 26

Question 2.
Complete the following conversions.
i) CH3NC + HgO → ?
ii) ? 2H2O → CH3NH2 + HCOOH
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 27
Answer:
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 28
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 29

Question 3.
i) Write the structures of different isomeric amines corresponding to the molecular formula C9H13N.
ii) What reducing agents can bring out reduction of nitrobenzene?
iii) Write the product formed when benzyl chloride is reacted with ammonia followed by treatment with methyl and ethyl chlorides. Write the product
Answer:
i) Given compound molecular formula C9H13N
The structures of different isomeric amines corresponding to the above formula C9H13N
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 30
ii) The reducing agents that bring out the reduction of nitro benzene are :

  1. H2/Pd (or) Pt (or) Ni [Ethanol]
  2. Sn + HCl (or) Fe + HCl
  3. Li AlH4
  4. Zn + alc.KOH
  5. Zn + NH4Cl

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

iii) a) Benzyl chloride reacts with ammonia to form benzyl amine followed by the reaction with methyl chloride forms N, N – Dimethyl phenyl methanamine
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 31

b) Benzyl chloride reacts with ammonia to form benzyl amine followed by the reaction with Ethyl chloride form
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 32

Question 4.
i) Identify the amide and cyanide which on reduction with appropriate reducing agent gives n – butylamlne.
ii) Write the mechanism of Hoffmann bromamide reaction.
Answer:
i) a) Propyl cyanide on reduction gives n – Butylamine
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 33
ii) Hoffmann bromamide reaction : It is a simple way of converting an amide to an amine having one carbon atom less than the starting amide. The reaction is a rearrangement which is brought about by bromide in presence of alkali. It is believed to proceed through the steps shown below.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 34
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 35

Question 5.
How do you make the following convertions ?
i) Chlorophenylmethane to phenylacetic acid
ii) Chlorophenylmethane to 2 – phenylethanamine.
Answer:
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 36

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Question 6.
Identify the starting amide which gives p – methyl aniline on reaction with bromine and sodium hydroxide and write all the steps involved in the reaction. .
Answer:
P – methyl Acetanilide reacts with bromine and sodium hydroxide to form P – methyl aniline.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 37
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 38

Question 7.
Explain why the order of basicity for methyl amine, N, N – dimethyl amine and N, N, N – tnmethyl amine changes in gasous and a aqueous medium.
Answer:
Given compounds
CH3NH2, (CH3)2NH, (CH3)3N and NH3
In the above compounds methyl substituted, ammonium ion gets stabilised due to dispersal of the positive charge by the + 1 effect of the methyl group. Hence methyl amines are stronger bases than ammonia. Basic nature of amines increase with in increase of methyl groups. This trend is followed in gaseous phase.
(CH3)3 N> (CH3)2 NH > CH3NH2 > NH3.
In the aqueous phase the substituted ammonium cations get stabilised not only by electron releasing effect of the alkyl group but; also by solvation with water molecules. Due to sterichindrance the basic strength of methyl amines in the aqueous state changed as follows
(CH3)2 NH > CH3 NH2> (CH3)3 N > NH3

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Question 8.
Write the equations involved in the reaction of Nitrous acid with Ethylamine and aniline.
Answer:
Reaction of Ethylamine with nitrous acid : Ethyl amine reacts with nitrous acid to form highly unstable diazonium salt which gives nitrogeñ gas and Ethyl alcohol after decomposition.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 39
Reaction of Aniline with nitrous acid : Aniline reacts with nitrous acid at low temperatures (0- 5°C) to form diazomum salts. (Benzene diazonium salt)
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 40

Question 9.
Explain with equations how methylamine, N, N – dimethylamine and N, N, N – trimethylamine react with benzenesulphonyl chloride and how this reaction Is useful to separate these amines.
Answer:
Benzene suiphonyl chloride is called Hinsbergs reagent. This is used to distinguish the 1°, 2°, 3° – amines.
-. with 1°- amine : Benzene sulphonyl chloride reacts with 1°-. amine and produce N – Alkyl benzene sulphonamide which is soluble in alkali.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 41
.- with 2° – amine: Benzene sulphonyl chloride reacts with 2° – amine and produce N, N – Dialkyl benzene sulphonamide which is insoluble in alkali
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 42
—, with 3° – amine: Benzene sulphonyl chloride does not react with benzene sulphonyl chloride.

Question 10.
Explain why aniline In strong acidic medium gives a mixture of Nitro anilines and what steps need to be taken to prepare selectively p – nitro aniline.
Answer:
In strong acidic medium anime under go nitration to form mixture of nitro animes. In strongly acidic medium aniline is protonated to form the anilinium ion which is metadirecting. So besides the ortho and para derivatives meta derivative also formed.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 43
By protecting – NH2 group by acetylation reaction with acetic an hydride the nitration reaction can be controlled and the – P – nitro derivative can be formed as major product.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 44

Question 11.
i) Account for the stability of aromatic diazoniun ions when compared to aliphatic diazonium ions.
ii) Write the equations showing the conversion of aniline diazoniumchloride to
a) chlorobenzene, b) Iodobenzene and c) Bromobenzene
Answer:
i) —> Aliphatic diazonium salts which are formed from 1° – aliphatic amines are highly unstable and liberate nitrogen gas and alcohols.
—> Aromatic diazonium salts formed from 1° – aromatic amines are stable for a short time in solution at low temperatures (0 – 5°C). The stability of arene diazonium ion is explained on the basis of resonance.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 45
ii) a) Conversion of aniline diazonium chloride to chloro benzene
C6H5N2+ Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 46 C6H5Cl + N2
b) Conversion of aniline diazonium chloride to Iodo benzene
C6H5N2+Cl + KI → C6H5I + N2 + KCl
c) Conversion of aniline diazonium chloride to Bromo benzene
C6H5N2+Cl Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 47 C6H5Br + N2

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Question 12.
Complete the following conversions : Aniline to
i) Fluorobenzene
ii) Cyanobenzene
iii) Benzene and
iv) Phenol
Answer:
i) Aniline to Fluorobenzene
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 48
ii) Aniline to cyano benzene
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 49
iii) Aniline to Benzene
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 50
iv) Aniline to phenol
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 51

Question 13.
Explain the following name reactions: [A.P. Mar. 18]
i) Sandmeyer reaction
ii) Gatterman reaction
Answer:
i) Sandmeyer reaction: Formation of chioro benzene, Brono benzene (or) cyano benzene from benzene diazonium salts with reagents Cu2Cl2/HCl, Cu2Br2/HBr, CuCN/KCN is called sandmayers reaction.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 52
ii) Gatterman reaction : Formation of chloro benzene, Bromobenzene from benzene diazonium salts with reagents Cu/HCl, Cu/HBr is referred as gatterman reaction.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 53

Question 14.
Write the steps involved in the coupling of Benzene diazoniumchloride with aniline and phenol.
Answer:
Benzene diazonium chloride reacts with phenol in which the phenol molecule at its para position is coupled with the diazonium salt to form P-hydroxyazobenzene. This type of reactionsis known as coupling reactions. Similarly the reaction of diazonium salt with aniline yields P – amino azobenzene.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 54

Question 15.
Write the equations involved in the conversion of acetamide and propanaldehydeoxime to methyl cyanide and ethyl cyanide respectively.
Answer:
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 55

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Write chemical equations for the following reactions:
i) Reaction of ethanolic NH3 with C2H5Cl.
ii) Ammonolysis of benzyl chloride and reaction of amine so formed with two moles of CH2Cl.
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 56

Question 2.
Write chemical equations for the following Conversions:
i) CH3 – CH2 – Cl into CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – NH2
ii) C6H5 – CH2 – Cl into C6H5 – CH2 – CH2 – NH2
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 57

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Question 3.
Write structures and IUPAC names of
i) the amide which gives propanamine by Hoffmann bromarnide reaction.
ii) the amine produced by the Hoffmann degradation of benzamide.
Solution:
i) Propanamine contains three carbons. Hence, the amide molecule must contain four carbon atoms. Structure and IUPAC name of the starting amide with four carbon atoms are given below:
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 58
ii) Benzamide is an aromatic amide containing seven carbon atoms. Hence, the amine formed from benzamide is aromatic primary amine containing six carbon atoms.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 59

Question 4.
Arrange the following in decreasing order of their basic strength:
C6H5NH2, C2H5NH2, (C2H5)2 NH, NH3. [T.S. Mar.’19]
Solution:
The decreasing order of basic strength of the above amines and ammonia follows the following order:
(C2H5)2NH > C2H5NH2 > NH3 C6H5NH2
Amines also react with benzoyl chloride (C6H5COCl). This reaction is known as benzoylation.
CH3NH2 + C6H5COCl → CH3NHCOC6H5 + HCl
Methanamine Benzoyl chloride N – Methylbenzamide
What do you think is the product of the reaction of amines with carboxylic acids ? They form salts with amines at room temperature.

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Question 5.
How will you convert 4 nitrotoluene to 2 – bromobenzoic acid?
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 60

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Classify the following amines as primary, secondary or tertiary.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 61
iii) (C2H5)2CHNH2
iv) (C2H5)2NH
Solution:
i) Primary
ii) Tertiary
iii) Primary
iv) Secondary.

Question 2.
i) Write the structures of different isomeric amines corresponding to the molecular – formula, C4H11N.
ii) Write IUPAC names of all the isomers.
iii) What type of isomerism is exhibited by different pairs of amines ?
Solution:
i) and ii) Eight isomers of C4H11N are :
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 62
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 63
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 64

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

iii) Isomerism exhibited by different amines are:
a) Chain isomers : i.e., have different carbon chains (a) and (b), (c) and (d).
b) Position isomers : i.e., functional group occupy different positions, (b) and (c), (b) and (d), (a) and (d).
e) Metamers: i.e., different alkyl groups are attached to the same functional group, (e) and (0, (g) and (e).
d) Functional isomers : i.e., have different functional groups. All the three categories (1°, 2° and 3°) of amines are the functional isomers of each other.

Question 3.
How will you convert
i) benzene into aniline ?
ii) benzene into N, N-dimethylaniline ?
iii) Cl-(CH2)4-Cl into hexan-1, 6-diamine ?
Solution:
i) Benzene into aniline:
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 65
ii) benzene into N, N-dimethylaniline
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 66
iii) Cl-(CH2)4-Cl into hexan-1, 6-diamine
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 67

Question 4.
Arrange the following in increasing order of their basic strength.
i) C2H5NH2, C6H5NH2, NH3, C6H5CH2NH2 and (C2H5)2NH
ii) C2H5NH2, (C2H5)2NH, (C2H5)3N, C6H5NH2
iii) CH3NH2, (CH3)2NH, (CH3)3N, C6H5NH2, C6H5CH2NH2
Solution:
i) C2H5NH2 < NH3 < C6H5CH2NH2 < C6H5NH2 < (C2H5)2NH
ii) C6H5NH2 < C2H5NH2 < (C2H5)3N < (C2H5)2NH
iii) C6H5NH2 < C6H5CH2NH2 < (CH3)3N< CH3NH2 < (CH3)2NH

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Question 5.
Complete the following acid-base reactions and name the products.
i) CH3CH2CH2NH2 + HCl →
ii) (C2H5)3N + HCl →
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 68

Question 6.
Write reactions of the final alkylation product of aniline with excess of methyl iodide in the presence of sodium carbonate solution.
Solution:
Hofmann’s ammonolysis reaction: In the presence of excess methyl iodide, aniline (primary amine) forms quartemary ammonium salt.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 69
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 70

Question 7.
Write the chemical reaction of aniline with benzoyl chloride and write the name of the product obtained.
Solution:
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 71

Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen

Question 8.
Write the structures of different isomers corresponding to the molecular formula C3H9N. ‘ Write IUPAC names of the isomers which will liberate nitrogen gas on treatment with nitrous acid.
Solution:
C3H9N has four isomers :
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 72

Question 9.
Convert :
(i) 3-methyl aniline into 3-nitrotoluene.
(ii) anline into 1, 3, 5-tribromobenzene.
Solution:
i) 3-methyl aniline into 3-nitrotoluene.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 73
(ii) Anline into 1, 3, 5-tribromobenzene.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 13 Organic Compounds Containing Nitrogen 74

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of their property indicated.

  1. Acetaldehyde, Acetone, Methyl t. butyl ketone reactivity towards HCN.
  2. Floroacetic acid, monochloroacetic acid, Acetic acid and Dichloroacetic acid (acid strength)

Answer:

  1. Due to the presence of groups around the carbonyl group the reactivity of a compound depends on the steric hindrance.
    Greater the steric hindrance, less will be the reactivity of the compound. Reactivity towards HCN is in the following order.
    Methyl tertiary butyl ketone < Acetone < Acetaldehyde
  2. Acid strength of given compounds is Dichloro acetic acid > fluoro acetic acid > chloro acetic acid > acetic acid.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 2.
Write the reaction showing a-halogenation of carboxylic acid and give its name.
Answer:
Carboxylic acids having a-hydrogens are halogenated at the a-position on treatment with chlorine or bromine in presence of small amount of red phosphorous to give a-halo carboxylic acids.
This reaction is named as Hell-volhard – Zelinsky (HvZ) reactions
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 1

Question 3.
Although phenoxide ion has more number of resonating structures thancarboxylate ion carboxylic acid is a stronger acid than phenol. Why ?
Answer:

  • Phenoxide ion has non-equivalent resonance structures in which the negative charge is at the less electronegative carbon atom.
  • The negative charge is delocalised over two electronegative oxygen atoms in carboxylate ion whereas in phenoxide ion the negative charge less effectively delocalised over one oxygen atom and less electronegative carbon atoms.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 2

Question 4.
How do you distinguish acetophenone and benzophenone?
Answer:
On idoform test Acetophenone gives positive, where as benzophenone (C6H5COC6H5) does not
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 3

Question 5.
Explain the position of electrophilic substitution In benzolc acid.
Answer:
Benzoic acid undergo electrophilic substitution reactions in which carboxyl group acts as a deactivating and meta dirécting group.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 4

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 6.
Write equations showing the conversion of
i) Acetic acid to Acetyl chloride
ii) Benzoic acid to Benzamide
Answer:
i) acetic acid reacts with PCl3 (or) PCl5 (or) SOCl6 to form acetyl chloride
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 5
ii) Benzoic acid reacts with ammonia to form benzamide
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 6

Question 7.
An organic acid with molecular formula C8H8O2 on decarboxylation forms Toluene. Identify the organic acid.
Answer:
The organic acid is phenyl acetic acid
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 7

Question 8.
List the reagents needed to reduce carboxylic acid to alcohol.
Answer:
The Reagents required to reduce carboxylic acid to alcohol are

  1. LiAlH4/Ether (or) B2H6
  2. H4O+

Question 9.
Write the mechanism of esterification.
Answer:
Mechanism of esterification of carboxylic acids : The esterification of carboxylic acids with alcohols is a kind of nucleophilic acyl substitution. Protonation of the carbonyl oxygen activates the carbonyl group towards nucleophilic addition of the alcohol. Proton transfer in the tetrahedral intermediate converts the hydroxyl group into – +OH2 group, which, being a better leaving group, is eliminated as neutral water molecule. The protonated ester so formed finally loses a proton to give the ester.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 8

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 10.
Compare the acidic strength of acetic acid, Chloroacetic acid, benzoic acid and Phenol. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) > Chloro acetic acid (ClCH2COOH) > Acetic acid (CH3COOH) > Phenol (C6H5OH)

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Write the equations of any aldehyde with Fehlings reagent.
Answer:
Fehling’s reagent is mixture of two solutions Fehling’s A and Fehlings B.
Fehling’s A – aq. CuSO4 solution
Fehling’s B – Sodium potassium tartarate (Rochelle salt)
Acetaldehyde reacts with Fehlings .eagent and gives a redbrown ppt.
Reaction:
CH3 – CHO + 2CU+2 + 5OH → RCOO + CU2O + 3H3O (Red – brown ppt)

Question 2.
What is Tollens reagent? Explain Its reaction with Aldehydes.
Answer:
Tollens Reagent : Freshly prepared ammonicai silver nitrate solution is called Tollens reagent.

On warming an aldehyde with Tollens reagent a bright silver mirror is produced due to formation of silver metal.
R – CHO + 2 [Ag(NH3)2]+ + 3OH → RCOO + 2Ag + 2H2O + 4NH3

Question 3.
Write the oxidation products of : Acetaldehyc, Acetone and Acetophenone.
Answer:
a) Acetaldehyde under goes oxidation to foim acetic acid.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 9
b) Acetone undergoes oxidation to form acetic acid
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 10
c) Acetophenone undergoes oxidation to form benzoicacid and chloroform
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 11

Question 4.
Explain why Aldehydes and ketones undergoes nucleophilic addition while alkenes undergoes electrophilic addition though both are unsaturated compounds.
Answer:
The carbon – oxygen double bond in carbonyl compounds is polarised due to higher electronegativity of oxygen relative to carbon. Hence the carbonyl carbon is an electrophilic and carboxyl oxygen is a nucleophilic centre. So aldehydes, ketones undergoes nucleophilic addition reaction.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 12
Alkenes contain AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 13 which is a source of electron density so electrophiles add no to C = C to give addition products. Hence alkenes undergo electrophilic addition reaction.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 5.
Write the IUPAC names of the following:
i) CH3CH2CH(Br) CH3COOH
ii) Ph. CH3COCH3COOH
iii) CH3.CH (CH3) CH2COOC2H5
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 14

Question 6.
Arrange the following In the increasing order of their acidic strength:
Benzolc acid, 4 – Methoxybenzoic acid, 4 – Nitrobenzoic acid and 4 – Methylbenzoic acid.
Answer:
Electron donating group (-OCH3) decreases the acidic strength where as electron withdrawing group (NO2) increases the same.
Increases order of acidic strength is:
4-Methoxy benzoic acid < benzoic acid < 4-nitrobenzoic acid < 3, 4-dinitro benzoic acid.

Question 7.
DescrIbe the following: .
i) Cross aldol condensation
ii) Decarboxylation
Answer:
i) Cross Aldol Condensation : When aldol condensation ¡s earned out between two different aldehydes and (or) ketones, it is called cross aldol condensation.

If both the reactants contain α-hydrogen atoms, it gives a mixture of four products.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 15
Ketones can also be used as one component in the cross aldol reactions
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 16
ii) Decarboxylatlon : Carboxylic acids lose carbon dioxide molecule to produce hydrocarbons on heating their sodium salts with sodalizne (a mixutre of NaOH & CaO in ratio 3 : 1)
.-, This reaction is called decarboxylation
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 17

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 8.
ExplaIn the role of electron withdrawing and electron releasing groups on the acidity of carboxylic acids.
Answer:

  • Electron with drawing groups increase the acidity of carboxylic acids by stabilising the conjugate base through decocalisation of the negative charge by inductive effect.
  • Electron donating groups decreases the äcidity of carboxylic acids by destabilising the conjugate base.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 18
    Eg : Cl is a electron with drawing group acidic strength order in case of chloro acetic acids
    CCl3COOH > CHCl2COOH > CH2ClCOOH > CH3COOH

Question 9.
Draw the structures of the following derivatives:
i) Acetaldehyde dimethyl acetal
ii) The ethylene ketal of hexan-3-one
iii) The methyl hemiacetal of formaldehyde.
Answer:
The structures of following are
i) Acetaldehyde dimethyl acetal
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 19
ii) Ethylene Ketal of hexan-3-one
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 20
iii) Methyl hemiacetal of formaldehyde
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 21

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 10.
An organic compound contains 69.77% carbon, 11.63% hydrogen and rest oxygen. The molecular mass of the compound is 86. It doesnot reduce Tollens’ reagent but forms sodium hydrogensulphite adduct and gives +ve iodoform test. On vigorous oxidation forms ethanoic and propanoic acids. Write the possible structure of the compound.
Answer:
Step : 1 To determine the molecular formula of the compound.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 22
Emperical formula of the given compound = C5H10O
Molecular formula = n × (emperical formula)
Where n = \(\frac{\text { Molecular mass of the compound }}{\text { Emperical formula mass of compound }}\)
Given, molecular mass = 86
Emperical formula mass of C5H10O = (12 × 5) + (10 × 1) + 16 = 60 + 10 + 16 = 86
n = \(\frac{86}{86}\) = 1
Molecular formula = 1 × (C5H10O)
∴ Molecular formula = C5H10O

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain the following terms. Give an example of the reaction in each case. [A.P. Mar. 18]
i) Cyanohydrin
ii) Acetal
iii) Semicarbazone
iv) Aldol
v) Hemiacetal
vi) Oxime
Answer:
i) Cyanohydrin
Aldehydes and ketones react withk hydrogen cyanide (HCN) forms addition products called (or) known as cyanohydrins.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 23

ii) Acetal
In the presence of dry HCl gas, an aldehyde reacts with two equivalents of a monohydric alchol forms gem-dialkoxy compounds are known as acetals.
—> In acetal two alkoxy groups are present on the terminal C-atom.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 24

iii) Semicarbazone
Aldehydes/ketones react with semicarbazide forms certain compounds called as senilcarbazones.
For example:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 25

iv) Aldol
When an aldehyde ((or) ketone) having at least one a-hydrogen atom undergo a reaction in the presence of dilute alkali as catalyst to form aldol (or) β- hydroxy aldehydes ((or) ketals in case of ketones), the reaction is called aldol condensation.
For example:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 26

v) Hemiacetat : In the presence of dry HCl gas an aldehyde reacts with one molecule of a monohydric alcohol forms gem-alkoxy alcohols. These are known as hemiacetals.
For example:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 27

vi) Oxime: In weak acidic medium, an aldehyde ketone reacts with hydroxylamine forms products which are known as oxims.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 28

Question 2.
Name the following compounds according to IUPAC system of nomenclature:
i) CH3CH(CH3)CH2CH2CHO
ii) CH3CH2COCH (C2H5)CH2CH2Cl
iii) CH3CH = CHCHO
iv) CH3COCH2COCH3
Answer:
IUPAC names of following
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 29
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 30

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 3.
Draw the structures of the following compounds.
i) 3-Methylbutanal
ii) p-Nitropropiophenone
iii) p-Metylbenzaldehyde
iv) 3-Bromo-4-phenylpentanoic acid
Answer:
i) 3 – Methyl butanal
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 31
ii) p-Nitropropiophenone
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 32

Question 4.
Write the IUPAC names of the following ketones and Aldehydes. Wherever possible, give also common names.
i) CH3CO(CH2)4 CH3
ii) CH3CH2CHBrCH2CH (CH3)CHO
iii) CH3(CH2)5CHO
iv) PhCH = CHCHO
v) AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 33
vi) PhCOPh
Answer:
i) CH3CO(CH2)4 CH3
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 34
IUPAC Name: Heptan-2-one
Common Name: Methnyl n-pentyl ketone

ii) CH3CH2CHBrCH2CH (CH3)CHO
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 35
IUPAC Name : 4 – bromo – 2 – methyl hexanal
Common Name : γ – bromo – α – methyl caproaldehyde

iii) CH3(CH2)5CHO
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 36
IUPAC Name: Heptanal
Common Name i n – heptyi aldehyde

iv) Ph – CH =CH – CHO
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 37
IUPAC Name : 3 – Phenyl Prop-2-en-1-al
Common Name: β – phenyl acrolein

v) AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 33
IUPAC Name: Cyclopentane Carbaldehyde

vi) PhCOPh
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 38
IUPAC Name : Diphenyl methanone
Common Name : Benzophenone

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 5.
Draw the structures of the following derivatives.
i) The 2, 4 – dinitrophenylhydrazone of benzaldehyde
ii) Cyclopropanone oxime
iii) Acetaldehyde hemiacetal
iv) The Semicarbazone of cyclobutanone
Answer:
i) The 2, 4 – dinitro phenyl hydrazone of benzaldehyde :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 39
ii) Cyclopropanone oxime
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 40
iii) Acetaldehyde hemiacetal
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 41
iv) The Semicarbazone of cyclobutanone
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 42

Question 6.
Predict the products formed when Cyclohexanecarbaldehyde reacts with following reagents.
i) PhMgBr and then H3O+
ii) Tollens reagent
iii) Semicarbazide and weak acid
iv) Zinc amalgam and dilute HCl
Answer:
The products are formed when cyclohexane carbaldehyde reacts with following.
i) Ph MgBr and the H3O+
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 43
ii) Tollens reagent
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 44
iii) Semicarbazide and weak acid
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 45
iv) Zinc amalgam and dilute HCl
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 46

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 7.
Which of the following compounds would Undergo aldol condensation ? Write the structures of the products expected.
i) 2-Methylpentanal
ii) 1-Phenylpropanone
iii) Phenyl acetaldehyde
iv) 2,2 – Dimethylbutanal
Answer:
Compounds having one (or) more a-H atoms undergo aedol condensation.
So from above only first three compounds having α-H atoms. Therefore they undergo aldol condensation. They are namely

  1. 2-methyl Pentanal
  2. 1 – Phenyl propanone
  3. Phenyl acetaldehyde

i) 2 – Methyl Pentanal
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 47
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 48
ii) 1 – Phenyl propanone
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 49
iii) Phenyl acetaldehyde
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 50

Question 8.
An organic compound A(C9H10O) forms 2, 4-DNP derivative, reduces Tollens’ reagent and undergoes Cannizaro reaction. On vigorous oxidation it gives 1, 2-benzene dicarboxylic acid. Identify the compound.
Answer:

  • The compouhd having molecular formula C9H10O forms a 2, 4 – DNP derivative and reduces Tollen’s reagent. So it is an aldehyde.
  • It undergoes cannizaro reaction, so the aldehyde group should be directly attached to the benzene ring.
  • On vigorous oxidation it gives 1,2- benzene dicarboxylic acid, so it should be an ortho substituted benzaldehyde. For molecular formula C9H10O, the possibility is only O-ethyl benzaldehyde.
  • The equations for all reactions are given below.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 51
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 52

Question 9.
How do you distinguish the following pairs of compounds ?
i) Propanal and propanone
ii) Acetophenone and benzophenone
iii) Phenol and benzoic acid
iv) Pentan-2-one and Pentan-3-one
Answer:
i) Propanal and Propanone
On idoform test propanone responds, but absence of CH3CO – group in propanal (CH3CH2CHO) it does not respond.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 53

ii) Acetophenone and benzophenone
Acetophenone gives positive idoform test whereas benzophenone (C6H5COC6H5) does not
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 54

iii) Phenol and benzoic acid
Benzoic acid reacts with sodium bicarbonate to produce effervescences of carbon dioxide where as phenol (C6H5OH) does not
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 55

iv) Pentan-2-one and Pentan – 3 – One
On idoform test Pentan – 2 – One-responds whereas Pentan – 3 – one (C2H5 COC2H5) does not
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 56

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 10.
How are the following conversions carried in not more than two steps ?
i) Ethanol to 3-hydroxybutanal
ii) Bromobenzene to 1-Phenylethanol
iii) Benzaldehyde to ± Hydroxyphenylacetic acid
iv) Benzaldehyde to benzophenone
Answer:
i) Ethanol to 3-hydroxybutanal
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 57
iv) Benzaldehyde to benzophenone
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 58

Question 11.
Describe the following. [A.P. & T.S. Mar. 19, 16] [A.P. Mar. 18]
i) Acetylation
ii) Cannizaro reaction
iii) Cross aldol condensation
iv) Decarboxylation
Answer:
i) Acetylation : When active hydrogen atom of alcohol, phenol (or) an amine is replaced by acetyl (CH3CO) group to form corresponding ester (or) amide, the reaction is known as acetylation.

Reagents used are acid chloride (or) acid anhydride in presence of a base like pyridine (or) dimethylaniline.
For example :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 59

ii) Cannizaro reaction: On treating with concentrated alkali, aldehydes which do not have any α – hydrogen atom, undergo self oxidation and reduction (disproportionation) reaction.
This reaction is called cannizaro reaction.

As a result, one molecule of aldehyde is reduced to alcohol while another is oxidised to carboxylic acid salt.
For example:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 60

iii) Cross aldol condensation: When aldol condensation is carried out between two different aldehydes and (or) ketones, it is called cross aldol condensation.

If both the reactants contain a – hydrogen atoms, it gives a mixture of four products.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 61
Ketones can also be used as one component in the cross aldol reactions
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 62

iv) Decarboxylation
Carboxylic acids lose carbon dioxide molecule to produce hydrocarbons on heating their sodium salts with sodalime (a mixutre of NaOH & CaO in ratio 3: 1). This reaction is called decarboxylation.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 63

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 12.
Complete each synthesis by giving the missing starting material, reagent or product.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 64
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 65
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 66

Question 13.
Explain how methyl ketones are distinguished from other ketones. Write the equations showing it.
Answer:
Oxidation of methyl ketones by haloform reactIon : Aldehydes and ketones having at least one methyl group linked to the carbonyl carbon atom (methyl ketones) are oxidisedby sodium hypohalite to sodium salts of corresponding carboxylic acids having one carbon atom less than that of carbonyl compound. The methyl group is converted to haloform. This oxidation does not affect a carbon-carbon double bond, If present in the molecule. lodoform reaction with sodium hypoiodite is also used for detection of CH3CO group or CH3CH(OH) group which produces CH3CO group on oxidation.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 67

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 14.
Write the equations showing the conversion of the following along with reagents.
i) 1-phenyipropane to Benzoic acid
ii) Benzamide to Benzoic acid
iii) Ethyl butanoate to Butanoic acid.
Answer:
i)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 68
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 69

Question 15.
Write the products and reagents needed for the below given conversions
i) 3-Nitrobromobenzene to 3-Nitrobenzoic acid
ii) 4-Methyl’acetophenone to Benzene- 1-4-dicarboxylic acid
Answer:
i) 3-Nitrobromobenzene to 3-Nitrobenzoic acid:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 70
ii) 4-Methyl’acetophenone to Benzene- 1-4-dicarboxylic acid
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 71

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Give names of the reagents ot bring about the following transformations:

  1. Hexan – 1 – ol to hexanal
  2. Cyclohexanol to cyclohexanone
  3. p – Fluorotoluene to p – fluorobenzaldehyde
  4. Ethanenitrile to ethanal
  5. Allyl alcohol to propanal
  6. But-2-ene to ethanal

Solution:

  1. C5H5NH+ CrO3Cl (PCC)
  2. K2Cr2O7 in acidic medium
  3. CrO3 in the presence of acetic anhydride/1. CrO2Cl25 2. HOH
  4. (Diisobutyl) aluminiinn hydride (DIBAL-H)
  5. PCC
  6. O3/H2O-Zn dust

Question 2.
Arrange the following compounds in the increasing order of their boiling points:
CH3CH2CH2CHO, CH3CH2CH2CH2OH, H5C2-O-C2H5, CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3
Solution:
The molecular masses of these compounds are in the range of 72 to 74. Since only butan-1- ol molecules are associated due to extensive intermolecular hydrogen bonding, therefore, the boiling point of butan-l-ol would be the highest. Butanal is more polar than ethoxyethane. Therefore, the intermolecular dipole-dipole attraction is stronger in the former. n-Pentane molecules have only weak vander Waals forces. Hence increasing order of boiling points of the given compounds is as follows :
CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3 < H5C2-O-C2H5 < CH3CH2CH2CHO < CH3CH2CH2CH2OH

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 3.
Would you expect benzaldehyde to be more reactive or less reactive in nucleophilic addition reactions than propanal ? Explain your answer.
Solution:
The carbon atom of the carbonyl group of benzaldehyde is less electrophilic them carbon . atom of the carbonyl group present in propanal. The polarity of the carbonyl group is reduced in benzaldehyde due to resonance as shown below and hence it is less reactive than propanal.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 72

Question 4.
An organic compound (A) with molecular formula C8H8O forms an orange-red precipitate with 2,4 – DNP reagent and gives yellow precipitate on heating with iodine in the presence of sodium hydroxide. It neither reduces Tollens or Fehlings reagent, nor does it decolourise bromine water or Baeyer’s reagent. On drastic oxidation with chromic acid, it gives a carboxylic acid (B) having molecular formula C7H6O2. Identify the compounds (A) and (B) and explain the reactions involved.
Solution:
(A) forms 2, 4 – DNP derivative. Therefore, it is an aldehyde or a ketone. Since it does not reduce Tollens or Fehling’s reagent, (A) must be a ketone. (A) responds to iodoform test. Therefore, it should be a methyl ketone. The molecular formula of (A) indicates high degree of unsaturation, yet it does not decolourise bromine water or Baeyers reagent. This indicates the presence of unsaturation due to an aromatic, ring.

Compound (B), being an oxidation product of a ketone should be a carboxylic acid. The molecular formula of (B) indicates that it should be benzoic acid and compound (A) should, therefore, be a monosubstituted aromatic methyl ketone. The molecular formula of (A) indicates that it should be phenyl methyl ketone (acetophenone). Reactions are as follows:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 73

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 5.
Write chemical reactions to affect the following transformations :
i) Butan-1-ol to butanoic acid
ii) Benzyl alcohol to phenylethanoic acid
iii) 3-Nitrobromobenzene to 3-nitrobenzoic acid
iv) 4 – Methylacetophenone to benzene – 1, 4 – dicarboxylic acid
v) Cyclohexene to hexane-1, 6 – dioic acid
vi) Butanal to butanoic acid.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 74
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 75
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 76

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Classify the following as primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 77
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 78
Answer:
Primary alcohols (1), (ii), (iii)
Secondary alcohols (iv) and (v)
Tertiary alcohols (vi)

Question 2.
Identify allylic alcohols In the above examples.
Answer:
Allylic alcohols (ii) and (vi)

Question 3.
Name of the following compounds according to IUPAC system.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 79
Solution:
i) 3-Chloromethyl – 2 isopropylpentan – 1 – ol
ii) 2, 5 – Dimethylhexane – 1, 3 – diol
iii) 3 – Bromocyclohexanol
iv) Hex- 1 -en-3-ol
v) 2-Bromo~3-methylbut-2-en-1-ol

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 4.
Show how are the following alcohols prepared by the reaction of a suitable Grignard reagent on methanal ?
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 80
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 81

Question 5.
Write the structures of the products of the following reactions :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 82
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 83

Question 6.
Predict the major product of acid catalysed dehydration of
i) 1 – methylcyclohexanol and
ii) butan – 1 – ol
Solution:
i) 1 – Methylcyclohexene
ii) A mixture of but-1-ene and but-2-ene. But-1-ene is the major product formed due to rearrangement to give secondary carbocation.

Question 7.
Write the reactions of Williamson synthesis of 2-ethyoxy-3-methylpentane starting from ethanol and 3-methylpentan-2-ol.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 84

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 8.
Which of the following Is an appropriate set of reactants for the preparation of 1 – methoxy-4-nltrobenzene?
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 85
Solution:
ii)

Question 9.
Predict the products of the following reactions:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 86
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 87

Question 10.
Write the structures of the following compounds.
i) α-Methoxypropionaldehyde
ii) 3- Hydroxybutanal
iii) 2-Hydroxycyclopentane carbaldehyde
iv) 4-Oxopentanal
v) Di-Sec. butyl ketone
vi) 4 – Fluoroacetophenone
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 88

Question 11.
Write the structures of products of the following reactions;
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 89
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 90

Question 12.
Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of their boiling points.
CH3CHO, CH3CH2OH, CH2OCH3, CH3CH2CH3
Solution:
CH3CH2CH3 < CH3OCH3 < CH3CHO < CH3CH2OH

Question 13.
Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of their reactivity in nucleophilic addition reactions.

  1. Ethanal, Porpanal, Propanone, Butanone.
  2. Benzaldehyde, p – Toualdehyde, p – Nitrobenzaldehyde, Acetophenone.

Solution:

  1. Butanone < Propanone < Propanal < Ethanal
  2. Acetophenone < p – Touladehyde, Benzaldehyde < p – Nitgrobenzaldehyde.
    Hint: Consider steric effect and electronic effect.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 14.
Predict the products of the following reactions :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 91
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 92
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 93

Question 15.
Give the IUPAC names of the following compounds:
i) Ph CH2CH2COOH
ii) (CH3)2C = CHCOOH
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 94
Solution:
i) 3-Phenylpropanoic acid
ii) 3 – Mehtylbut-2-enoic acid
iii) 2-Metylcyclopentanecarboxylicacid
iv) 2, 4, 6 – Trinitrobenzoic acid

Question 16.
Show how each of the following compounds can be converted to benzoic acid.
i) Ethylbenzene
ii) Acetophenone
iii) Bromobenzene
iv) Phenylethene (Styrene)
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 95
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 96+

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids

Question 17.
Which acid of each pair shown here would you expect to be stronger?
i) CH3CO2H or CH2FCO2H
ii) CH2FCO2H or CH2ClCO2H
iii) CH2FCH2CH2CO2H or CH3CHFCH2CO2H
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 97
Solution:
i) CH3COOH
ii) CH2FCOOH
iii) CH3CHFCH2COOH
iv) AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(b) Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids 98

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain why propanol has higher boiling point than that hydrocarbon-butane.
Answer:
Propanol has higher boiling point (391 K) than that hydrocarbon butane (309K).

Reason : In propanol strong intermolecular hydrogen bonding is present between the molecules. But in case of butane weak vander waals force of attractions are present.

Question 2.
Alcohols are comparatively more soluble in water than hydrocarbons of comparable molecular masses. Explain this fact.
Answer:
Alcohols are comparatively more soluble in water than hydrocarbons of comparable molecular masses.
Explanation: .

  • Alcohols and water are both polar solvents. Alcohol is dissolves in water, due to formation of hydrogen bonding with water molecules.
  • Hydro carbons are non polar and these dorv.t form hydrogen bonds with water molecules. So alcohols are soluble in water where as hydrocarbons are not soluble in water.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 3.
Give the structures and IUPAC names of monohydric phenols of molecular formula, C7H8O.
Answer:
Given molecular formula of monnhydric phenols is C7H8O. The no. of possible isomers with molecular formula C7H8O are three.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 1

Question 4.
Give the reagents used for the preparation of phenol from chiorobenzene.
Answer:
Phenol is prepared from chiorobenzene as follows. Reagents required are

  1. NaOH, 623K, 300 atm
  2. HCl.
    Chemical reaction :
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 2

Question 5.
Preparation of ethers by acid dehydration of secondary or tertiary alcohols is not a suitable method. Give reason.
Answer:
Only 1° – alcohols form Ethers on acid dehydration. But not 2° or 3°-alcohols.

Reason : In case of 2° or 3° alcohols steric hindrance arises. Due to this steric hindrance alkenes are formed but not Ethers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 6.
Write the mechanism of the reaction of HI with methoxymethane.
Answer:
Case – I: When methoxy methane reacts with cold.dil. HI then methyl alcohol and methyl iodide are formed.
Mechanisms:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 3
Case – II : When methoxy methane reacts with hot.conc.HI then only methyl iodide is formed.
Mechanisms:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 4

Question 7.
Name the reagents used in the following reactions.

  1. Oxidation of primary alcohol to carboxylic acid
  2. Oxidation of primary alcohol to aldehyde.

Answer:

  1. The reagents used for the oxidation of 1° – alcohols to carboxylicacid are acidified K2Cr2O77 (or) Acidic/alkaline KMnO4 (or) Neutral KMnO4
  2. The reagents used for the oxidation of 1°- alcohols to aldehyde are pyridine chloro chromate (PCC) in CH2Cl2.

Question 8.
Write the equations for the following reactions.
i) Bromination of phenol to 2,4, 6-tribromophenol
ii) Benzyl alcohol to benzoic acid.
Answer:
i) Bromination of phenól to 2, 4, 6 tribromophenol.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 5

Question 9.
IdentIfy the reactant needed to form t-.butylalcohol from acetone.
Answer:
When acetone reacts with methyl magnesium bromide followed by the hydrolysis forms t-butyl alcohol.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 6

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 10.
Write the structures for the following compounds

  1. Ethoxyethane
  2. Ethoxybutane
  3. Phenoxyethane

Answer:

  1. Ethoxyethane → CH3 – CH2 – O – CH2 – CH3
  2. Ethoxybutane → CH3 – CH2 – O – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH3
  3. Phenoxyethane → C6H5 – O – CH2 – CH3

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Draw the structures of all isomeric alcohols of molecular formula C5H12O2 and give their IUFAC names and classify them as primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols.
Answer:

  • Given molecular formula of compound is C5H12O.
  • It has eight isomeric alcohols.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 7
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 8

In the above isomeric alcohols (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) and 1°-alcohols; (v), (vi) and (viii) are 2°- alcohols, (vii) is 3°-alcohol.

Question 2.
While separating a mixture of ortho and para nitrophenols by steam distillation, name the isomer which will be steam volatile. Give rèason.
Answer:
While separating a mixture of ortho and para nitrophenols by steam distillation, ortho nitrophenol is steam volatile.

Reason: In ortho nitrophenol intra molecular hydrogen bonding is present and in case of para nitrophenol inter molecular hydrogen bonding is present. So O-nitrophenol is steam volatile.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 9

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 3.
Give the equations for the preparation of phenol from Cumene. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Phenol.is prepared from Cumene as follows.

  1. Oxidation of Cumene to Cumene hydroperoxide.
  2. Cumene hydroperoxide on acidic hydrolysis to form phenol.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 10

Question 4.
Write the mechanism of hydration of ethene to yield ethanol.
Answer:
Hydration of Ethene to yield ethanol involves 3—step mechanism.
Step – 1: In step – 1 formation of carbocation takes place by the protonation of ethene.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 11
Step – 2 : In step – 2 carbocation formed in the above step attacked by water.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 12
Step – 3 : Ethyl alcohol is formed by he deprotonation in step -3
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 13

Question 5.
Explain the acidic nature of phenols and compare with that of alcohols.
Answer:
The reaction of phenol with sodium metal and with aq.NaOH indicates the acidic nature of phenol.
i) Phenol reacts with sodium metal to form sodium phenoxide.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 14

  •  In phenol hydroxyl group is attached to the Sp2 hydridised carbon of benzene ring which acts as electron with drawing group. The formed phenoxide ion from phenol is more stabilised due to delocalisation of negative charge.

Comparison of acidic character of Phenol and Ethanol:

  • The reaction of phenol with aq. NaOH indicates that phenols are stronger acids than alcohols.
  • The hydroxyl group attached to an aromatic ring is more acidic than in hydroxyl group is attached to an alkyl group.
  • Phenol forms stable phenoxide ion stabilised by resonance but ethoxide ion is not.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 15

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 6.
Write the products formed by the reduction and oxidation of phenol.
Answer:
a) Reduction of phenol: Phenol undergo reduction in presence of zinc dust to form benzene.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 16
b) Oxidation of phenol : Phenol undergo oxidation with chromicacid and forms a conjugated diketone known as benzoquinone.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 17

Question 7.
Ethanol with H2SO4, at 443K forms ethene while at 413 K it forms ethoxy ethane. Explain the mechanism.
Answer:
Case – 1: Ethanol reacts with Cone. H2SO4 at 443K forms ethene
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 18
Mechanism:
Step – 1: Formation of protonated alcohol
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 19
Step 2 : Formation of carbo cation
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 20
Step 3 : Formation of ethene by elimination of a proton
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 21
Case – II : Ethanol reacts with Cone. H2SO4 at 413 K to form ethoxy ethane.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 22
Mechanism:
In the above reaction ether formation is a SN reaction. This involve attack of alcohol molecule on a protonated alcohol.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 23

Question 8.
Account for the statement: Alcohols boil at higher temperature than hydrocarbons and ethers of comparable molecular masses.
Answer:
Alcohols boil at higher temperature than hydrocarbons and ethers of comparable molecular masses.

Explanation : Consider ethanol, propane and methoxy methane which are having comparable molecular masses. The boiling points, molecular masses and structures of the above compounds mentioned below.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 24
The higher boiling points of alcohols are due to the presence of intermolecular hydrogen bonding in them which is lacking in ethers and hydrocarbons.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 9.
Explain why in anisole electrophilic substitution takes place at ortho and para positions and not at meta position.
Answer:
Anisole is an aryl alkyl ether. In anisole the group -OCH3 influences + R effect. This increases the electron density in the benzene ring and it leads to the activation of benzene ring towards electrophihic substitution reactions.

In Anisole eletron density is more at O-and P-Positions but not at m—position. So 0-and P-products are mainly formed during electrophillic substitution reactions.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 25

Question 10.
Write the products of the following reactions :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 26
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 27
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 28

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Write the IUPAC name of the following compounds :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 29
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 30

Question 2.
Write structures of the compounds whose IUPAC names are as follows:
i) 2, Methyl butan—ol
ii) 1-Phenylprpan-2-ol
iii) 3, 5-Dhuethylhexane-1, 3, 5-triol
iv) 2, 3-Diethylphenol
v) 1-Ethoxypropane
vi) 2-Ethoxy-3-methylpentane
vii) Cyclohexylmethanol
viii) 3-Chloromethylpentan-1-ol
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 31
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 32

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 3.
Write the equations for the preparation of phenol using benzene, conc. H2SO4 and NaOH. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
The equations for the preparation of phenol using conc.H2SO4 and NaoH as follows
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 33

Question 4.
Illustrate hydroboration-oxidation reaction with a suitable example.
Answer:
When alkenes undergo addition reaction with diborane to form tri alkyl boranes. These followed by the oxidation by alkaline H2O2 to form alcohols. This reaction is called as hydroboration-oxidation reaction.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 34

Question 5.
Write the IUPAC name of the following compounds:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 35
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 36

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 6.
How will you synthesise:
i) 1 – Phenylethanol from a suitable alkene
ii) Cyclohexylmethanol using an alkyl halide by an SN2 reaction.
iii) Pentan-1-ol using a suitable alkyl halide.
Answer:
i) Synthesis of 1-phenylethanol from a suitable alkene : When styrene undergo hydrolysis in presence of dil.H2SO4 to form 1-phenyl ethanol. It is an example of Marknowni koff’s rule.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 37
ii) Synthesis of cyclohexyl methanol using an alkyl halide by SN2 reaction : When cyclohexyl methyl bromide reacts with aq. NaOH to form cyclohexyl methanol.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 38
iii) Synthesis of 1-pentanol using a suitable alkyl halide: When 1-Bromo pentane reacts with aq.KOH to form 1-pentanol.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 39

Question 7.
Explain why-
i) Ortho nitrophenol is more acidic than Ortho methoxyphenol.
ii) OH group attached to benzene ring activates it towards electrophilic substitution.
Answer:
i) Ortho nitrophenol is more acidic than Ortho methoxyphenol.
Explanation: .
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 40

  • -NO2 is an electron withdrawing group and -OCH3 is electron releasing group.
  • By the presence of electron withdrawing group the phenoxide ion is more stabilized. By the presence of electron releasing group the phenoxide ion is less stabilized.
  • Due to high stability of phenoxide ion, acidic nature increases.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 41

ii) The -OH group attached to benzene ring activates it towards electrophilic substitution.

Explanation : When an electrophile is attacked, the – OH group exerts +R effect on the benzene ring. So electrodensity in the ring increases at ortho and para positions. When an electrophile attacks, substitution takes place at O and p-positions. So benzene ring activates towards electrophilic substitution.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 42

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 8.
Wth a suitable example write equations for the following:. [T.S. MAr. 19, 18; A.P. Mar. 18, 16] [A.P. Mar. 16]
i) Kolbe’s reaction
ii) Reimer-Tiemann reaction
iii) Williamsons ether synthesis
Answer:
i) Kolbes reaction: Phenol reacts with sodium hydroxide to form sodium phenoxide. This undergoes electrophilhic substitution with CO2to form salicylic acid.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 43

ii) Relmer-Tlemann reactIon : Phenol reacts with chloroform in presence of NaOH to form salicylaldehyde (O-Hydroxy benzaldehyde). This reaction is known as Reimer-Tiemann reaction. .
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 44

iii) Wilhiamsons ether synthesis:

  • This method is used for the preparation of symmetrical and unsymmetrical ethers.
  • The reaction of an alkyl halide with sodium alkoxide to form ethers is known as Williamsons Synthesis.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 45

Question 9.
How are the following conversions carried out?
i) Benzyl chloride to Benzyl alcohol
ii) Ethyl magnesium bromide to Propan-1-ol
iii) 2-Butanone to 2-Butanol
Answer:
i) Conversion of Benzyl chloride to Benzyl alcohol : Ben.zyl chloride reacts with aq. NaOH to form benzyl alcohol.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 46

ii) Conversion of Ethyl magnesium bromide to Propan-1-ol : Ethyl magnesium bromide reacts with form aldehyde followed by hydrolysis to form 1-propanol.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 47

iii) Conversion of 2-Butanone to 2-Butanol: 2-Butanone undergo reduction in presence of LiA/H4 to form 2-Butanol.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 48

Question 10.
Write the names of the reagents and equations for the preparation of the following ethers by Williamson’s synthesis:
i) 1-Propoxypropane
ii) Ethoxybenzene
iii) 2-Methoxy-2-methylpropane
iv) 1 -Methoxyethane
Answer:
i) Preparation of 1-propoxy propane :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 49
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 50

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 11.
How is 1-propoxypropane synthesized from propan-1-ol ? Write mechanism of this reaction.
Answer:
1 – Proponal reacts with Conc. H2SO4 at 413 K to form 1-propoxy propane.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 51

Question 12.
Explain the fact that in aryl alkyl ethers the alkoxy group activates the benzene ring towards electrophilic substitution.
Answer:
Anisole is an aryl alkyl ether. In anisole the group -OCH3 influences +R effect. This increases the electron density in the benzene ring and it leads to the activation of benzene ring towards electrophillic substitution reactions.

In Anisole eletron density is more at O-and P-Positions but not at m-position. So O-and P-products are mainly formed during electrophillic substitution reactions.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 52

Question 13.
Write equations of the below given reactions:
i) Alkylation of anisole
ii) Nitration of anisole
iii) Friedel-Crafts acetylation of anisole
Answer:
i) Friedel crafts Alkylation of anisole :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 53
ii) Nitration of anisole
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 54

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 14.
Show how you would synthesize the following alcohols from appropriate alkenes?
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 55
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 56
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 57

Question 15.
Explain why phenol with bromine water forms 2,4,6-tribromophenol while on reaction with bromine in CS2 at low temperatures forms para-bromophenol as the major product.
Answer:
a) Phenol under goes Bromination in presence of CS2 to form p-bromophenol as major product.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 58
b) Phenol undergoes bromination in aqueous medium form 2,4,6 -tribromo phenol (white ppt).
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 59
Explanation: In bromination of phenol, the polarisation of Br2 molecule takes place even in the absence of Lewis acid. This is due to the highly activating effect of -OH group attached to the benzene ring.

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Give IUPAC names of the following compounds:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 60
Solution:
i) 4-Chloro-2, 3-dimethylpentan-1-ol
ii) 2-Ethoxypropane
iii) 2, 6-Dimethyiphenol
iv) 1-Ethoxy-2-nitrocyclohexane

Question 2.
Give the structures and IUPAC names of the products expected from the following reactions :
a) Catalytic reduction of butanal.
b) Hydration of propene in the presence of dilute sulphuric acid.
c) Reaction of propanone with methylmagnesium bromide followed by hydrolysis.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 61

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 3.
Arrange the following sets of compounds in order of their increasing boiling points :
a) Pentan-1-ol, butan-1-ol, butan-2-ol, ethanol, propan-1-ol, methanol.
b) Pentan-1-ol, n-butane, pentanal, ethoxyethane.
Solution:
a) Methanol, ethanol, propan-1-ol, butan-2-ol, butan-1-ol, pentan-1-ol.
b) n-Butane, ethoxyethane, pentanal and pentan-1-ol.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 62

Question 4.
Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of their acid strength:
Propan-1-ol, 2, 4, 6-trinitrophenol, 3-nitrophenol, 3, 5-dinitrophenol, phenol, 4-methylphenol.
Solution:
Propan-1-ol, 4-methylphenol, phenol, 3-nitrophenol, 3, 5-dinitrophenol, 2, 4, 6-trinitrophenol.

Question 5.
Write the structures of the major products expected from the following reactions:
a) Mononitratlon of 3-methylphenol .
b) Dinitratlon of 3methylphenol
c) Mononitration of phenyl methanoate.
Solution:
The combined influence of -OH and -CH3 groups determine the position of the incoming group.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 63

Question 6.
The following is not an appropriate reaction for the preparation of t-butyl ethyl ether.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 64
i) What would be the major product of this reaction?
ii) Write a suitable reaction for the preparation of t-butylethyl ether.
Solution:
i) The major product of the given reaction is 2-methylprop-1-ene.
It is because sodium ethoxide is a strong nucleophile as well as a strong base. Thus elimination reaction predominates over substitution.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 65

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 7.
Give the major products that are formed by heating each of the following ethers with HI.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 66
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 67

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Classify the following as primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 68
Answer:
Primary alcohols (i), (ii), (iii)
Secondary alcohols (iv) and (y)
Tertiary alcohols (vi)

Question 2.
Identify allylic alcohols in the above examples.
Answer:
Allylic alcohols are (ii) and (vi)

Question 3.
Name the following compounds according to IUPAC system.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 69
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 70
Answer:
i) 3-Chioremethyl 2-isopropylpentan-1-ol
ii) 2, 5-Dimethylhexane-1, 3-dial
iii) 3-Bromocyclohexanol
iv) Hex-1-en-3-ol
v) 2-Bromo-3-methylbut-2-en-1-ol.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 4.
Show how are the following alcohols prepared by the reaction of a suitable Grignard reagent of methanol?
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 71
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 72

Question 5.
Write structures of the products of the following reactions :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 73
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 74
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 75

Question 6.
Predict the major product of acid catalysed dehydration of

  1. 1-methylcyclohexanol and
  2. butan-1-ol.

Answer:

  1. 1-Methylcyclohexene
  2. A mixture of but-1-ene and but-2-ene. But-1-ene is the major product formed due to rearrangement to give,secondary carbocation.

Question 7.
Write the reactions of Williamson synthesis of 2-ethoxy-3-methylpentane starting from ethanol and 3-methylpentan-2-ol.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 76

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers

Question 8.
Predict the products of the following reactions:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 77
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 12(a) Alcohols, Phenols, and Ethers 78

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 11th Lesson Haloalkanes And Haloarenes Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 11th Lesson Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Write the structures of the following compounds.
i) 2-chloro-3-methylpentane,
ii) 1-Bromo-4-sec-butyl-2-methylbenzene.
Answer:
i) 2-chloro-3-methylpentane
Structure :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 1

ii) 1-Bromo-4-sec-butyl-2-methylbenzene.
Structure :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 2

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 2.
Which one of the following has highest dipole moment ?
i) CH2Cl2
ii) CHCl3
iii) CCl4
Answer:
CH2Cl2 has high dipole moment (μ = 1.62 D) among the three alkyl halides.
Reason: The total of two C – Cl dipole moments is reinforced by the total of two C-H bonds.
CCl4 has zero dipole pioment. CHCl3 has 1.03 D dipole moment due to presence of C-H bond.

Question 3.
What are ambident nucleophiles ?
Answer:
Ambident nucleophiles: The nucleophiles which are able to attack at two (or) more different sites are called ambident nucleophiles.
Eg.: Alkyl halides react with AgCN to form alkyl cyanide and isocyanides.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 3

Question 4.
Write the isomers of the compound having molecular formula C4H9Br.
Answer:
Compound having molecular formula C4H9Br has five isomers.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 4

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 5.
Which compound in each of the following pairs will react faster in SN2 reaction with -OH?
(i) CH3Br or CH3I
(ii) (CH3)3CCl or CH3Cl
Answer:
i) CH3 – I reacts faster in SN2 – reaction with OH than CH3 – Br.
Reason: The bond dissociation enthalpy of C -1 bond (234 KJ/mole) is less than that of (-Br bond (293 KJ/mole).

ii) CH3 – Cl reacts faster in SN2-reaction with -OH than-(CH3)3C-Cl.
Reason: The order of reactivity of alkyl halides in SN2-reactions is l°-alkyl halide > 2°- alkyl halide > 3°-alkyl halide.
Due to high steric hindrance in 3°-alkyl halide i.e., (CH3C – Cl. It is less reactive towards SN2-reaction, whereas in case of CH3-Cl (1°-alkyl halide) less steric hindrance observed. So, it is high reactive towards SN2-reactions.

Question 6.
Explain why the alkyl halides though polar are immiscible with water.
Answer:
Alkyl halides are polar but these do not dissolve in water i.e., immiscible in water.
Reason : Among water molecules strong inter molecular hydrogen bonding is present. This hydrogen bond is difficult to be broken by alkyl halides.

Question 7.
Out of C6H5CH2Cl and C6H5CHClC6H5, which is more easily hydrolysed aqueous KOH ?
Answer:
Out of C6H5CH2Cl and C6H5CHClC6H5 the 2nd one i.e., C6H5CHClC6H5 gets hydrolysed more easily than C6H5CHCl.

This can be explained by considering SNI reaction mechanism. In case of SNI reactions reactivity depends upon the stability of carbo cations.
C6H5CHClC6H5 forms more stable carbo cation than C6H5CH2Cl.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 5

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 8.
Treatment of alkyl halides with aq.KOH leads to the formation of alcohols, while in presence of alc.KOH what products are formed ?
Answer:

  • Treatment of alkyl halides with aq. KOH leads to the formation of alcohols. Here Nucleo- phillic substitution reaction takes place.
    Eg.: C2H5Cl + aq.KOH → C2H5OH + KCl
  • Treatment of alkyl halides with alc.KOH leads to the formation of alkenes. Here elimination reaction takes place.
    E.g.: C2H5Cl + alc. KOH → C2H4 + KCl + H2O

Question 9.
What is the stereochemical result of SN1 and SN2 reactions ? [T.S. Mar. 17]
Answer:

  • The stereochemical result of SN1 reaction is reacemisation product.
  • The stereochemical result of N2 reaction is inversion product.

Question 10.
What type of isomerism is exhibited by O, m and p-chlorobenzenes ?
Answer:
o, m and p-chloro benzenes exhibits position isomerism.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 6
These are positional isomers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 11.
What are Enantiomers? [T.S. Mar. 19]
Answer:
Enantiomers : The stereo isomers relatëd to each other as non-superimposable mirror images are called enantiomers.

  • These have identical physical properties like melting point, boiling points refractive index etc.
  • They differ in rotation of plane polarised right.

Short Answer Questions

Questions 1.
Give the IUPAC names of the following compounds.
i) CH3CH(Cl)CH(I)CH3
ii) ClCH2CH = CHCH2Br
iii) (CCl3)3CCl
iv) CH3C(p-Cl-C6H4)2CH(Br)CH3
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 7
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 8

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 2.
Write the structures of the following organic halides.
i) 1-Bromo-4-sec-butyl-2-methylbenzene,
ii) 2-Chioro- 1 -phenylbutane
iii) p-bromochlorobenzene l
iv) 4-t-butyl-3-iodoheptane.
Answer:
i) 1-Bromo-4-sec-butyl-2-methylbenzene.
Structure:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 9

ii) 2-chloro- 1-phenylbutane.
Structure:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 10

iii) p-bromo chlorobenzene Br
Structure:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 11

iv) 4-t-butyl-3-iodoheptane
Structure:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 12

Question 3.
A hydrocarbon C5H10 does not react with chlorine in dark but gives a single monochloro- compound C5H9Cl in bright sunlight. Identitfy the hydrocarbon.
Answer:

  • The given compound molecular formula C5H10. It represents general formula CnH2n. It may be an alkene (or) cyclo alkane.
  • Given that the alkene does not react with Cl2 in dark condition it is not an alkene, so it is a cyclo alkene.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 13

Question 4.
Which compound in each of the following pairs will react faster in. SN2 reaction with -OH ? [A.P. Mar. 19]
i) CH3Br or CH3I
ii) (CH3)3CO or CH3Cl .
Answer:

  1. Among CH3Br and CH3I, CH3 – I reacts faster in SN2 reaction with OH because bond dissociation energy of C – I is less than the bond dissociation energy of C – Br.
  2. Among CH3Cl and (CH3)3CCl, CH3 – Cl reacts faster in SN2 reaction with OH because (CH3)3CCl has high steric hindrance than CH3Cl.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 5.
Predict the alkenes that would be formed in the following reactions and identify the major alkene.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 14
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 15

Question 6.
How will you carry out the following conversions ?
i) Ethane to bromomethene
ii) Toluene to benzyl alcohol
Answer:
i) Conversion of Ethane to Bromo Ethane.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 16
ii) Conversion of toluene to benzyl alcohol:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 17

Question 7.
Explain why the dipole moment of chlorobenzene Is lower than that of cyclohexyichloride.
Answer:
The dipole moment of chloro benzene is lower than that of cylo hexyl chloride.
Explanation:

  • The polarity of C – Cl bond in chiorobenzene is less than the polarity of C — Cl bond in cyclo hexyl chloride.
  • The above fact is due to the sp2 hybridisation of ‘C’ atom in chiorobenzene where as in cyclo hexyl chloride ‘C’ atoms hybridisation is sp3 – hybridisation.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 18

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 8.
Write the mechanism of the following reaction.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 19
Answer:
Given reaction is
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 20
CN ion is an ambident nucleophile. It has the tendency to attack through C-atom (or) through N-atom. Attack through C-atom results cyanide product and attack through N- atom results isocyanide. But in presence of polar solvent KCN ionises and forms cyanide as major product.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 21

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Name the following halides according to IUPAC system and classify them as primary, secondary, tertiary, vinyl or aryl halides,
i) CH3CH(CH3)CH(Br)CH3
ii) CH3C(Cl)(C3H5)CH2CH3
iii) m-ClCH2C6H4CH2C(CH3)3
iv) O-Br-C6H4CH(CH3)CH2CH3
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 22
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 23
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 24

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 2.
Write the structures of the following organic halogen compounds.
i) 2-Bromo-3-methylhexane
ii) 2-(2-chlorophenyl)-1-iodooctane
iii) 4-tertiary-butyl-3-iodo benzene
iv) 1-Bromo-4-sec-butyl-2-methylbenzene.
Ans:
i) 2-Bromo-3-methyl hexane
Structure:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 25

ii) 2-(2-chloro phenyl) 1-iodo octane
Structure:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 26

iii) 4-tertiary-butyl-3-iodo benzene
Structure:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 27

iv) 1 -Bromo-4-sec-butyl-2 -methyl benzene
Structure:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 28

Question 3.
Discuss the physical properties of haloalkanes.
Answer:
Physical properties of halo alkanes:

  1. Pure alkyl halides are colourless, Bromides and iodides exhibits colour when exposed to light.
  2. Most of volatile halogen compounds have sweet smell.
  3. Lower members of alkyl halides are gases and higher members are liquids (or) solids.
  4. The boiling points of chlorides, bromides and iodides are higher than those of hydrocarbons.
  5. The boiling points of alkyl halides decrease as follows RI > RBr > RCl > RF.
  6. In case of isomeric halo alkanes boiling points decrease with increase in branching.
  7. The density of halo alkane, increase with increase in no. of carbon atoms, halogen atoms and atomic mass of the halogen atoms.
  8. Halo alkanes, have theTendency to dissolve in organic solvents and are very slightly soluble in water.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 4.
Explain the mechanism of Nucleophilic bimolecular substitution (SN2) reaction with one example. [T.S. Mar. 16] [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Nucleophilic Bimolecular substitution Reaction SN2:

  1. The nucleophilic substitution reaction in which rate depends upon concentration of both reactants is called SN2 reaction.
  2. It follows 2nd order kinetics. So it is called bimolecular reaction.
    Eg.: Methyl chloride reacts with hydroxide ion and forms methanol and chloride ion.
  3. Here the rate of reaction depends upon the concentration of two reactants.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 29
  4. In the above mechanism the configuration of carbon atom under attack inverts in much the same way as an umbrella is turned inside out when caught in a strong wind. This process is called inversion of configuration.
  5. In transition state the carbon atom is simultaneously bonded to the incoming nucleophile and out going group. It is very unstable.
  6. The order of reactivity for SN2 reactions follows : 1°-alkyl halides > 2°-alkyl halides > 3°-alkyl halides.

Question 5.
Explain why allylic and benzylic halides are more reactive towards SN1 substitution while 1-halo and 2-halobutanes preferentially undergoes SN2 substitution.
Answer:
1) Allylic and benzylic halides show high reactivity towards the SN1 reaction.
Reason: The carbocation thus formed gets stabilised through resonance phenomenon as shown below.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 30

2) 1-halo and 2-halo butanes preferentially under goes SN2 substitute.
Reason : SN2 reactions involve transition state formation. Higher the steric hindrance lesser the stability of transition state. The given 1-halo and 2-halo butanes have less steric hindrance so these are preferentially undergo SN2 reaction.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 6.
Describe the stereo chemical effect on the hydrolysis of 2-bromobutane.
Answer:
When S-2-Bromobutane is allowed to undergo hydrolysis R-2-butanol is formed with the – OH group occupying the position opposite to what bromide had occupied. This is an example of SN2 – reaction. SN2 reactions of optically active halides are accompanied by inversion of configuration.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 31

Question 7.
What is the criteria for optical activity. Give two examples of chiral molecules.
Answer:
Optical activity: The property of rotating the plane polarized light by a chemical substance is called optical activity.

  • If the plane polarised light rotates in clock wise direction then it is dextro rotatory [(+) (or) d-forms].
  • If the plane polarised light rotates in anti-clock wise direction then it is laevo rotatory [(-) or /-form].

Crieteria for optical activity:

  1. Chirality (or) dissymmetry is the necessary and sufficient condition for a molecule to show optical activity.
    Chirality : The objects which are non-superimposable on their mirror images are said to be chiral and this property is known as chirality.
  2. Asymmetry (absence of symmetry) of the molecule is responsible for the optical activity of organic compounds.
    Examples of chiral molecules :

    1. 2-Butanol
    2. 2-Chlorobutane
    3. 2-Bromopropanoic acid.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 8.
Define the following:    [A.P. Mar. 16]
i) Racemic mixture
ii) Retention of configuration
iii) Enantiomers.
Answer:
i) Racemic mixture: Equal portions of Enantiomers combined to form an optically inactive mixture. This mixture is called racemic mixture.

  1. Here rotation due to one isomer will be exactly cancelled by the rotation of due to other isomer.
  2. The process of conversion of enantiomer into a racemic mixture is called as racemisation.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 32

ii) Retention of configuration: The preservation of the integrity of the spatial arrangement of bonds to an asymmetric centre during a chemical reaction (or) transformation is called Retention of configuration.
General Eg : Conversion of XCabc chemical species into YCabc.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 33
Eg : (-) 2 – Methyl 1 – butanol conversion into (+) 1 – chloro 2. Methyl butane

iii) Enantiomers : The stereo isomers related to each other as non-superimposable mirror images are called enantiomers.

  • These have identical physical properties like melting point, boiling points refractive index etc.
  • They differ in rotation of plane polarised light.

Question 9.
Write the mechanism of dehydrohalogenation of 2-bromobutane.
Answer:
Dehydrohalogenation of 2 – Bromobutane: 2 – Bromobutane reacts with alc.KOH to form 2 – Butene as major product.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 34
Mechanism:

  • 2 – Bromobutane heated with alc.KOH elemination of hydrogen atom from β – carbon and bromine atom from α – carbon takes place. This is called β – Elimination.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 35
  • 2 – Butene is major product formed according to saytzev’s rule. “In dehydrohalogenation reactions the preferred product is that alkene which has the greater no. of alkyl groups attached to double bonded carbon atoms”.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 10.
Explain the Grignard reagents preparation and application with suitable example.
Answer:
Alkyl magnesium halides are generally called as Grignard reagenty.
Preparation: These are prepared by the treatment of alkyl halides with magnesium metal in presence of dry ether.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 36

Applications:
Grignard reagents have wide applications in the synthesis of large no. of organic compounds.

  1. Preparation of alkanes :
    Grignard reagents reacts with alcohols and forces alkanes.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 37
  2. Preparation of alcohols : Ethylalcohol is obtained by the action of Methyl magnesium bromide on formal dehyde followed by the hydrolysis.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 38
  3. Preparation of carboxylicacids:
    Grignard reagent on carboxylation followed by the hydrolysis to form carboxylic acids.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 39

Question 11.
A primary alkyl halide C4H9Br(A) reacted with alcoholic KOH to give compound B. B on reaction with HBr yields C which is an isomer of A. When A is reacted with sodium metal forms D, C8H8 which is different from the compound formed when n-butylbromide is reacted with sodium. Give the structural formulae of A-D and write equations for all the reactions.
Answer:
Given 1° – alkyl halide molecular formula C4H9Br
Two isomers possible with molecular formula C4H9Br (i- alkyl halides)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 40
Given that compound ‘A’ when reacted with Na does not forms the same product produced by n — Butyl bromide.
∴ isomer I cannot be ‘A’.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 41
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 42

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 12.
Account for the following statements:
i) Aryihalides are extremely less reactive towards Nucleophilic substitution reactions.
ii) p-Nitrochlorobenzene and o, p-dinitrochlorobenzene undergo Nucleophilic substitution readily compared to chlorobenzene.
Answer:
i) Aryl halides are extremely less reactive towards nucleophilic substitution reactions due to following reasons.

  • In aryl halides ‘C’ undergoes SP2 hybridised and it has greater S – character ånd electro negativity So the C – X bond length is shorter.
  • In aryl halides resonance effect plays an important role.
    The electron pairs on halogen atom are in conjugation with it π – electrons of the ring.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 43
    In the above C – Br bond acquires apartial double bond nature due to resonance. This bond cleavage is difficult.
  • The phenyl cation formed in aryl halides is not stabilised by resonance.

ii) p – nitrochlorobenzene and o, p – dinitro chlorobenzene undergo nucleophillic substitution reachily compared to chlorobenzene due to the following reasons.

  • Due to presence of – NO2 group which is an electron with drawing group at ’O’ and ‘P’ – positions in the ring makes the bond breaking easy.
  • As the number of NO2 groups increases reactivity of aryl halide also increases. This can be evidended by the following reactions.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 44
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 45

Question 13.
Explain how the following conversions are carried out:
i) Propene to Propanol
ii) Ethanol to but-1-yne
iii) 1-Bromopropane to 2-Bromopropane
iv) Aniline to Chlorobenzene.
Answer:
i) Propene to propanol
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 46
iv) Aniline to chlorobenzene
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 47

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 14.
What happens when
i) n-butylchloride is treated with alc.KOH.
ii) Bromobenzene is treated with Mg in presence of dry ether.
iii)Methylbromide is treated with sodium in presence of dry ether.
Answer:
i) n-Butylchloride + treated with alc.KOH undergo dehydro halogenation and forms 1-Butene.
CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – Cl + alc. KOH → CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2 + kCl + H2O

ii) Bromobenzene is treated with Mg in presence of dry ether forms phenyl magnesium bromide a Grignard reagent.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 48

iii) Methyibromide is treated with sodium in presence of dry ether forms ethane (wurtz reaction)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 49

Question 15.
Write the reactions showing the major and minor products when chlorobenzene is reacted with CH3Cl and CH3COCl in presence of AlCl3.
Answer:
i) Friedel crafts alkylation : When chiorobenzene is treated with CH3Cl to form 1 – Chloro – 4 – Methyl benzene (major) and 1 – Chloro 2 – Methylbenzene (minor).
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 50

ii) Friedel Craft’s acylation: Chlorobenzene reacts with CH3COCl in presence of Anhydrous AlCl3 to form 2 – Chloro actophenone, (Minor) and 4 – Chloro acetophenone (major).
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 51

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Draw the structures of all the eight structural isomers that have the molecular formula C5H11Br. Name each isomer according to IUPAC system and classify them as primary, secondary or tertiary bromide.
Solution:
CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2Br      1-Bromopentane (1°)
CH3CH2CH2CH(Br)CH3      2-Bromopentane (2°)
CH3CH2CH(Br)CH2CH3       3-Bromopentane (2°)
(CH3)2CHCH2CH2Br            1-Bromo-3-methylbutane (1°)
(CH3)2CHCHBrCH3              2-Bromo-3-methylbutane (2°)
(CH3)2CBrCH2CH3               2-Bromo-2-methylbutane (3°)
CH3CH2CH (CH3) CH2Br     1-Bromo-2-methylbutane (1°)
(CH3)3CCH2Br                      1-Bromo-2, 2-dimethyipropane (1°)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 2.
Write IUPAC names of the following:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 52
Solution:

  1. 4-Bromopent-2-ene
  2. 3-Bromo-2-methylbut-l-ene
  3. 4-Bromo-3-methylpent-2-ene
  4. 1-Bromo-2-methylbut-2-ene
  5. 1-Bromobut-2-ene
  6. 3-Bromo-2-methylpropene

Question 3.
Identify all the possible monochloro structural isomers expected to be formed on free radical monochlorination of (CH3)2CHCH2CH3.
Solution:
In the given molecule, there are four different types of hydrogen atoms. Replacement of these hydrogen atoms will give the following.
(CH3)2CHCH2CH2Cl
(CH3)2CHCH(Cl)CH3
(CH3)2C(Cl)CH2CH3
CH3CH(CH2Cl)CH2CH3

Question 4.
Write the products of the following reactions
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 53
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 54

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 5.
Haloakanes react with KCN to form alkyl cyanides as main product while AgCN forms isocyanides as the chief product. Explain.
Solution:
KCN is predominantly ionic and provides cyanide ions in solution. Although both carbon and nitrogen atoms are in a position to donate electron pairs, the attack takes place mainly through carbon atom and not through nitrogen atom since C-C bond is more stable than C-N bond. However, AgCN is mainly covalent in nature and nitrogen is free to donate electron pair forming isocyanide as the main product.

Question 6.
In the following of halogen compounds, which would undergo SN2 reaction faster ?
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 55
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 56 It is primary halide and therefore undergoes SN2 reaction faster.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 57 As iodine is a better leaving group because of its large size, it will be released at a faster rate in the presence of incoming nucleophile.

Question 7.
Predict the order of reactivity of the following compounds in SN1 and SN2 reactions.
i) The four isomeric bromobutanes
ii) C6H5CH2Br, C6H5CH(C6H5)Br, C6H5CH(CH3)Br, C6H5C(CH3)(C6H5)Br
Solution:
i) CH3CH2CH2CH2Br < (CH3)2CHCH2Br < CH3CH2CH(Br)CH3 < (CH3)3CBr (SN1)
CH3CH2CH2CH2Br > (CH3)2CHCH2Br > CH3CH2CH(Br)CH3 > (CH3)3CBr (SN2)
Of the two primary bromides, the carbocation intermediate derived from (CH3)2CHCH2Br is more stable than that derived from CH3CH2CH2CH2Br because of greater electron donating inductive effect of (CH3)2CH-group. Therefore, (CH3)2CHCH2Br is more reactive than CH3CH2CH2Br in SN1 reactions. CH3CH2CH(Br)CH3 is a secondary bromide and (CH3)3 CBr is a tertiary bromide. Hence the above order is followed in SN1. The reactivity in SN2 reactions follows the reverse order as the steric hinderance around the electrophilic carbon increases in that order.

ii) C6H5C(CH3)(C6H5) Br > C6H5CH(C6H5)Br > C6H5CH(CH3)Br > C6H5CH2Br (SN1)
C6H5C(CH3) (C6H5) Br < C6H5CH(C6H5)Br < C6H5CH(CH3)Br < C6H5CH2Br (SN2)
Of the two secondary bromides, the carbocation intermediate obtained from C6H5CH(C6H5)Br is more stable than obtained from C6H5CH(CH3)Br because it is stabilised by two phenyl groups due to resonance. Therefore, the former bromide is more reactive than the latter in SN1 reactions. A phenyl group is bulkier than a methyl group. Therefore, C6H5CH(C6H5)Br is less reactive than C6H5CH(CH3)Br in SN2 reactions.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 8.
Identify chiral molecules in each of the following pair of compounds. (Wedge and Dash representations according to Inter 1 yr., fig. 13.1).
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 58
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 59

Question 9.
Although chlorine is an electron withdrawing group, yet it is ortho-, para-directing in electrophilic aromatic substitution reactions. Why ?
Solution:
Chlorine withdraws electrons through inductive effect and releases electrons through resonance. Through inductive effect, chlorine destabilises the intermediate carbocation formed during the electrophilic substitution.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 60
Through resonance, halogen tends to stabilise the carbocation and the effect is more pronounced at ortho-and para-positions. The inductive effect is stronger than resonance and causes net electron withdrawl and thus causes net deactivation. The resonance effect tends to oppose the inductive effect for the attack at ortho-and para-positions and hence makes the deactivation less for ortho-and para-attack. Reactivity is thus controlled by the stronger inductive effect and orientation is controlled by resonance effect.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Write structures of the following compounds:
i) 2-Chloro-3-methylpentane
ii) 1-Chloro-4-ethylcyclohexane
iii) 4-tert. Butyl-3-iodoheptane
iv) 1, 4-Dibromobut-2-ene
v) 1-Bromo-4-sec. butyl-2-methylbenzene.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 61

Question 2.
Why is sulphuric acid not used during the reaction of alcohols with KI ?
Answer:
H2SO4 cannot be used along with KI in the conversion of an alcohol to an alkyl iodide as it converts KI to corresponding acid, HI which is then oxidised by it to I2.

Question 3.
Write structures of different dihalogen derivatives of propane.
Answer:

  1. ClCH2CH2CH2Cl
  2. ClCH2 CHClCH3
  3. Cl2CHCH2 CH3
  4. CH3CCl2 CH3

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 4.
Among the isomeric alkanes of molecular formula C5H12, identify the one that on photo¬chemical chlorination yields.
i) A single monochloride,
ii) Three isomeric monochlorides,
iii) Four isomeric monochlorides.
Answer:
i)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 62
All the hydrogen atoms are equivalent and replacement of any hydrogen will give the same product.

ii) CaH3CbH2CcH2CbH2CaH3
The equivalent hydrogens are grouped as a, b and c. The replacement of equivalent hydrogens will give the same product.

iii)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 63
Similarly the equivalent hydrogens are grouped as a, b, c and d. Thus, four isomeric products are possible.

Question 5.
Draw the structures of major monohalo products in each of the following reactions.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 64
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 65

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 6.
Arrange each set of compounds in order of increasing boiling points.

  1. Bromomethane, Bromoform, Chloromethane, Dibromomethane.
  2. 1 – Chloropropane, Isopropyl chloride, 1 – Chlorobutane.

Answer:

  1. Chloromethane, Bromomethane, Dibromomethane, Bromoform. Boiling point increases with increase in molecular mass.
  2. Isoporpylchloride, 1 – Chloropropane, 1 – Chlorobutane. Isopropylchloride being branched has lower b.p. than 1 – Chloropropane.

Question 7.
Which alkyl halide from the following pairs would you expect to react more rapidly by an SN2 mechanism ? Explain your answer.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 66
Answer:
i) CH3CH2CH2CH2Br Being primary halide, there won’t be any steric hindrance.

ii)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 67
Secondary halide reacts faster than tertiary halide.

iii)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 68
The presence of methyl group closer to the halide group will increase the steric hindrance and decrease the rate.

Question 8.
In the following pairs of halogen compounds, which compound undergoes faster SN1 reaction?
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 69
Answer:
i) AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 70 Tertiary halide reacts faster than secondary halide because of the greater stability of tert-carbocation.

ii) AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 71 Because of greater stability of secondary carbocation than primary.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes

Question 9.
Identify A, B, C, D, E, R and R1 in the following:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 72
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 11 Haloalkanes And Haloarenes 73

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 10th Lesson Chemistry In Everyday Life Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 10th Lesson Chemistry In Everyday Life

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What are drugs?
Answer:
Drug: The chemicals of low molecular masses ranging from 100 to 500 U that react with macromolecular targets to produce biological responses are called drugs.
E.g.: Morphine, Codeine, Heroin etc.,

Question 2.
When are the drugs called medicines?
Answer:
When the biological response of a drug is therapeutic arid useful then the chemical substances (drugs) are called medicines.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 3.
Define the term chemotherapy.
Answer:
Chemotherapy : The use of medicines (chemical substances) in the treatment of diseases is called chemotherapy.
In chemotherapy diagnosis, prevention and treatment of diseases involved.

Question 4.
Name the macromolecules that are chosen as drug targets.
Answer:
The macromolecules that are chosen as drug targets are carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, nucleic acids and enzymes.

Question 5.
What are enzymes and receptors ?
Answer:
Enzymes : The proteins which perform the role of biological catalysts in the body are called enzymes.
Receptors : The proteins which are crucial to communication system in the body are called receptors.

Question 6.
Which forces are involved in holding the drug to the active site of enzymes ?
Answer:
The forces involved in holding the drugs to the active site of enzymes are ionic bonds, vander waal’s forces, hydrogen bonds, dipole-dipole interactions etc.,

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 7.
What are enzyme inhibitors ?
Answer:
The drugs which inhibits the catalytic activity of enzymes and can block the binding site of the enzyme and prevent the binding of substrate are called enzyme inhibitors.

Question 8.
What is allosteric site ?
Answer:
Some drugs do not bind to the enzyme’s active site and bind to a different site of enzyme. This different site of enzyme is called allosteric site.

Question 9.
What are antagonists and agonists ?
Answer:
Antagonists : The drugs that bind to the receptor site and inhibit its natural function are called antagonists.

  • These are useful when blocking of message is required.

Agonists : The drugs that mimic the natural messenger by switching on receptors are called agonists.

  • These are useful when there is lack of natural chemical messenger.

Question 10.
Why do we need to classify the drugs in different ways ?
Answer:

  1. By knowing the pharmacological effect it makes easy for doctors.
  2. Antacid can be used in case of excessive acidity in stomach.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 11.
What are antacids ? Give example. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Antacids : Chemicals that remove the excess of acid in the stomach and maintain the pH to normal level are antacids. E.g. : Omeprazole, Lansoprozole etc.,

Question 12.
What are antihistamines ? Give example.
Answer:
Antihistamines : Chemicals that prevent the interaction of histamines with receptors of the stomach wall thus producing less amount of acid are antihistamines.
E.g. : Dimetapp, Terfenadine (Seldane).

Question 13.
While antacids and antiallergic drugs interfere with the function of histamines why do not these interfere with the function of each other ?
Answer:
Antacids and antiallergic drugs donot interfere with the function of each other because they work on different receptors in the body.

Question 14.
What are tranquilizers ? Give example.
Answer:
Tranquilizers : The drugs which are used in the management (or) treatment of psychoes and neuroses are called tranquilizers.
E.g.: Luminal, Seconal, Barbituric acid etc.,

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 15.
What are barbiturates ?
Answer:
Barbiturates : Derivatives of barbituric acid which functions as important class of tranquilizers are called barbiturates.
E.g.: Veronal, Amytatt etc.,

Question 16.
What are analgesics ? How are they classified ?
Answer:
Analgesics : These are to reduce or totally abolish pain without causing impairment of consciousness, mental confusion, incoordination, paralysis, disturbances of nervous system etc. Analgesics are classified as

  1. Narcotic analgesics : These are most potent and clinically useful agents causing depression of central nervous system and at the same time act as strong analgesics.
    E.g. : Morphine, Codeine etc.
  2. Non-narcotic analgesics : These drugs are analgesics but they have no addictive properties. Their analgesic use is limited to mild aches and pains.
    E.g.: Aspirin, Ibuprofen etc.

Question 17.
What are narcotic analgesics ? Give example.
Answer:
Narcotic analgesics: These are most potent and clinically useful agents causing depression of central nervous system and at the same time act as strong analgesics.
E.g. : Morphine, Codeine etc.

Question 18.
What are non-narcotic analgesics ? Give example.
Answer:
Non-narcotic analgesics: These drugs are analgesics but they have no addictive properties. Their analgesic use is limited to mild aches and pains.
E.g.: Aspirin, Ibuprofen etc.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 19.
What are antimicrobials ?
Answer:
Antimicrobials : The chemical substances which destroy (or) prevent the developement (or) inhibit the pathogenic action of microbes such as bacteria, fungi, virus are called antimicrobials.
E.g.: Lysozyme, Lactic acid etc.,

Question 20.
What are antibiotics ? Give example. [T.S. Mar. 19; A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Antibiotics: The chemical substances produced by micro organisms and inhibit the growth or destroy microorganisms are called antibiotics.
(Or)
The substance produced totally or partly by chemical synthesis which in low concentration inhibits the growth (or) destroy microorganism by intervening in their metabolic process are called antibiotics.
E.g. : Penicillin, Chloramphenicol etc.

Question 21.
What are antiseptics ? Give example. [T.S. Mar. 19; A.P. Mar. 19, 15]
Answer:
Antiseptics : The chemical compounds that kill (or) prevent the growth of micro organism are called antiseptics.
Antiseptics are the chemical substances applied on the living tissues such as wounds, cuts, ulcers and diseased skin surfaces.
E.g. : Dettol, Bithional etc.

Question 22.
What are disinfectants ? Give example.
Answer:
Disinfectants : The chemical compounds used for killing (or) preventing the growth of microorganism are called disinfectants.

  • These are applied to inanimate objects like floors, drainage systems etc…
    E.g.:

    • 4% aqueous solution of formaldehyde called formalin is a disinfectant
    • 0.3 ppm chlorine aqueous solution is disinfectant.
    • SO2 in very low concentration is disinfectant.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 23.
Name a substance which can be used as an antiseptic as well as disinfectant.
Answer:
Phenol is used as antiseptic as well as disinfectant.

  1. 0.2% phenol is antiseptic.
  2. 1% phenol is disinfectant.

Question 24.
What is the difference between antiseptics and disinfectants ?
Answer:
Antiseptics are the chemical substances applied on the living tissues such as wounds, cuts, ulcers and diseased skin surfaces.
Disinfectants are applied to inanimate objects such as floors, drainage system, instruments etc.

Question 25.
What are the main constituents of dettol ?
Answer:
Dettol (antiseptic) is a mixture of chloroxylenol and terpineol.

Question 26.
What is tincture of iodine ? What is its use ?
Answer:
Tincture of iodine (antiseptic) is a mixture of 2 – 3% Iodine solution in alcohol-water.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 27.
What are antifertility drugs ? Give example.
Answer:
Antifertility drugs: These are birth control pills and contain a mixture of synthetic estrogen and progesterone derivatives.
E.g. : Norethindrone, Ethynylestradiol (novestrol)

Question 28.
Why chemicals are added to food ?
Answer:
Chemicals are added to food for

  1. preservation
  2. enhancing their appeal
  3. adding nutritive value in them.

Question 29.
Name different categories of food additives.
Answer:
The following are the categories of food additives.

  1. Food colours
  2. Flavours and sweetners
  3. Fat Emulsifiers and stabilising agents
  4. Anti oxidants
  5. Flour improvers – antistaling agents and bleaches
  6. Preservatives .
  7. Nutritional supplements such as minerals, vitamins and amino acids.

Question 30.
What are artificial sweetening agents ? Give example. [A.P. Mar. 16; 15]
Answer:
The chemical substances which are used instead of sucrose (or) sugar are called artificial sweetening agents.
E.g.: Aspartame, Alitame, saccharin.
These decrease the calorific intake and at the same time several times sweater than sucrose.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 31.
Why do we require artificial sweetening agents ?
Answer:

  1. Artificial sweetening agents are very useful to diabetic persons.
  2. These decrease the calorific in take and at the same time several times sweeter than sucrose.
  3. These are harmless.

Question 32.
Why is the use of aspartame limited to cold foods and drinks ?
Answer:
Aspartame is unstable at cooking temperature so it’s use is limited to cold foods and soft drinks. –

Question 33.
Name the sweetening agent used in the preparation of sweets for a diabetic patient.
Answer:
The sweetening agent used in the preparation of sweets for a diabetic patient is saccharin (or) sucralose. It is stable at cooking temperature.

Question 34.
What problem does arise in using alitame as artificial sweetener ?
Answer:
While using alitame as artificial sweetener, the control of sweetness of food is difficult. Alitame is a high potency sweetner.

Question 35.
What are food preservatives ? Give example.
Answer:
The chemical substances which prevent the spoilage of food due to microbial growth are called food preservatives.
E.g.: Sodium benzoate, Salt of sorbic acid etc.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Questions 36.
Name two most familiar antioxidants used as food additives.
Answer:
The most familiar antioxidants are butylated hydroxy toluene (BHT) and butylated hydroxy anisole (BHA)

Question 37.
What is saponification ?
Answer:
The process of formation of soaps Containing sodium salts by heating esters of fatty acid with aq. NaOH solution is called saponification.

Questions 38.
What are soaps chemically ?
Answer:
Chemically soaps are sodium (OF) potassium salts of long chain fatty acids.
E.g.: Sodium stearate.

Question 39.
Why do soaps not work in hard water ?
Answer:
In hard water Ca, Mg-dissolved salts are present. Ca+2, Mg+2 ions form insoluble Ca, Mg, soaps respectively when sodium (or) potassium soaps are dissolved in hard water.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 1

  1. These insoluble soaps separate as scum in water and are useless as cleansing agent. These are problematic to good washing because the ppt adheres into the fibres of cloth as gummy mass.
  2. Hair washed with hard water looks dull.
  3. Dye does not absorb evenly on cloth washed with soap using hard water due to this gummy mass.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 40.
What are synthetic detergents ?
Answer:
The cleasing agents which are having all the properties of soaps but do not contain any soap are called synthetic detergents.
Synthetic detergents can be used both in soft and hard water as they give foam even in hard water.
E.g.: Sodium dodecyl benzene sulphonate.

Question 41.
What is the difference between a soap and a synthetic detergent ?
Answer:

  1. Generally soaps are sodium or potassium salts of long chain fattyacids.
  2. Synthetic detergents are cleansing agents having all the properties of soaps and do not contain any soap.
  3. Soaps do not work in hard water but synthetic detergents can be used both in soft and hard water as they give foam even in hard water. Some of the detergents give foam even in ice cold water.

Question 42.
How are synthetic detergents better than soaps ? [Mar 14]
Answer:
Soaps do not work in hard water but synthetic detergents can be used both in soft and hard water as they give foam even in hard water. Some of the detergents give foam even in ice cold water.

Question 43.
Name the different categories of synthetic detergents.
Answer:
Synthetic detergents are classified into three types

  1. nionic detergents
  2. Cationic detergents
  3. Non-ionic detergents.

Question 44.
Can you use soaps and synthetic detergents to check the hardness of water ?
Answer:

  1. Soaps are used to check the hardness of water because soaps form insoluble precipitate with hard water.
  2. Detergents are soluble in both types of water i.e hardwater and soft water, so detergents are not used to check the hardness of water.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 45.
If water contains dissolved calcium hydrogen carbonate, out of soaps and synthetic detergents which one will you use for cleaning clothes and why ?
Answer:
Water contains dissolved calcium hydrogen carbonate is called hard water. This water form insoluble precipitate with soap. Synthetic detergents donot form this type of precipitates, so synthetic detergents are used for cleaning clothes with water containing dissolved Ca(HCO3)2.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain the term target molecules or drug targets as used in medicinal chemistry.
Answer:
Drug Targets (or) Target molecules: Macro molecules like carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, nucleic acids and enzymes which interact with the drugs are ailed drug targets (or) Target molecules.

Question 2.
Explain the catalytic action of enzymes as drug targets.
Answer:
a) Catalytic action of Enzymes : In the enzyme catalytic activity it performs two functions

  1. The first function of an enzyme is to hold the substrate for a chemical reaction. Substrate bind to active site of enzyme through ionic bonding, hydrogen bonding, vander waal force etc.
  2. The second function of an enzyme is to provide functional groups that will attack the substrate, and carry out the chemical reaction.

b) Drug- Enzyme interaction :

  1. Drugs which inhibit the catalytic activity of the enzymes are called Enzyme inhibitors.
  2. Drugs which compete with the substrate for their attachment on active sites of enzymes are called competitive inhibitors.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 2

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 3.
Explain the drug – enzyme interaction.
Answer:
Explanation of drug – Target interaction with Enzymes :

  1. The proteins which perform the role of biological catalysts in the body are called enzymes.
  2. The binding of inhibitor ai allosteric site changes the shape of the active site.
  3. If the bond formed between an enzyme and an inhibitor is a strong covalent bond it cannot be broken easily In this case enzyme is blocked permanently and the body then degrades the enzyme-inhibitoi complex and synthesises the new enzyme.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 3

Question 4.
Why are cimetidine and ranitidine better antacids than sodium hydrogen carbonate or magnesium hydroxide or aluminium hydroxide.
Answer:
Sodium hydrogen carbonate or magnesium hydroxide (or) aluminium hydroxide treatment as antacids control only symptoms and not the cause. In advanced stages, ulcers become life threatening and only treatment is removal of affected part of stomach.
The drugs cinetidine, ranitidine prevent the interaction of histamine with the receptors present in the stomach wall and results in release of lesser amount of acid.
So cinetidine, ranitidine are better antacids than NaHCO3 (or) Mg(OH)2 (or) Al(OH)3.

Question 5.
Low level of noradrenaline in the cause of depression. What type of drugs are needed to cure this problem ? Name two drugs.
Answer:
If the level of Noradrenaline is low then the signal sending activity becomes low and the person suffers from depression. In this situations antidepressant drugs (tranquilizers) are required, These drugs inhibit the enzymes which catalyse the degradation of noradrenaline. If the enzyme is inhibited, this important neurotransmitter is slowly metabolised and can activate its receptor for longer periods of time.

Two important antidepressant drugs are IProniazid and phenelzine.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 6.
What are analgesics ? How are they classified ? Give examples. [T.S. & A.P. Mar. 19]
Answer:
Analgesics : These are to reduce or totally abolish pain without causing impairment of consciousness, mental confusion, incoordination, paralysis, disturbances of nervous system etc.
Analgesics are classified as

  1. Narcotic analgesics : These are most potent and clinically useful agents causing depression of central nervous system and at the same time act as strong analgesics.
    E.g. : Morphine, Codeine etc.
  2. Non-narcotic analgesics : These drugs are analgesics but they have no addictive properties. Their analgesic use is limited to mild aches and pains.
    E.g.: Aspirin, Ibuprofen etc.

Question 7.
What are different types of microbial drugs ? Give one example for each.
Answer:
Antimicrobials : The chemical substances which destroy or prevent the developement (or) inhibit the pathogenic action of microbes such as bacteria, fungi, virus are called antimicrobials.
E.g.: Lysozyme, Lactic acid etc.,
Different types of antimicrobial drugs are antibiotics, antiseptics, disinfectants.
1) Antibiotics : The chemical substances produced by micro organisms and inhibit the growth or destroy microorganisms are called antibiotics.
(Or)
The substance produced totally or partly by chemical synthesis in low concentration inhibits the growth (or) destroy microorganism by intervening in their metabolic process are called antibiotics.

2) Antiseptics: The chemical compounds that kill (or) prevent the growth of micro organism
are caiied antiseptics. .
Antiseptics are the chemical substances applied on the living tissues such as wounds, cuts, ulcers and diseased skin surfaces.

3) Disinfectants : The chemical compounds used for killing (or) preventing the growth of microorganism are called disinfectants.
These are applied to inanimate objects like floors, drainage systems etc…
E.g.:

  • 4% aqueous solution of formaldehyde called formalin is a disinfectant
  • 0.3 ppm chlorine aqueous solution is disinfectant.
  • SO2 in very low concentration is disinfectant.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 8.
Write the characteristic properties of antibiotics.
Answer:
Characteristic properties of antibiotics :

  1. Antibiotic drugs must be the products of metabolism. ,
  2. Antibiotic drugs are effective in low concentration.
  3. Antibiotic drug retards the growth (or) survival of microorganism.
  4. Antibiotic should be a synthetic substance produced as a structural analogue of naturally occurring antibiotic.
  5. Antibiotics have either cidal (killing) effect (or) a static (inhibiting) effect on microbes.
    E.g.: Penicillin, Ofloxacin are Bactericidal.
    Erythromycin, Tetracycline are Bacteriostatic.

Question 9.
What is meant by the term broad spectrum antibiotics ? Explain.
Answer:
The range of bacteria (or) other micro organisms that are effected by a certain antibiotic is expressed as its spectrum of action.
Broad spectrum antibiotics : Antibiotics which kill (or) inhibit a wide range of gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria are called broad spectrum antibiotics.

Question 10.
What are broad spectrum and narrow spectrum antibiotics ? Give one example for each.
Answer:
The range of bacteria (or) other micro organisms that are effected by a certain antibiotic is expressed as its spectrum of action.
Broad spectrum antibiotics : Antibiotics which kill (or) inhibit a wide range of gram¬positive and gram-negative bacteria are called broad spectrum antibiotics.

Narrow spectrum antibiotics: Antibiotics which are effective mainly against gram-positive (or) gram-negative bacteria are called narrow spectrum antibiotics,
E.g.: Penicillin – G is a narrow spectrum antibiotic.

Limited spectrum antibiotics : Antibiotics which are effective mainly against a single organism (or) disease are called as limited spectrum antibiotics.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 11.
Write notes on antiseptics and disinfectants.
Answer:
Antiseptics: The chemical compounds that kill (or) prevent the growth of micro organism are called antiseptics.
Antiseptics are the chemical substances applied on the living tissues such as wounds, cuts, ulcers and diseased skin surfaces.
E.g.: Dettol, Bithional etc.
Phenol is used as antiseptic as well as disinfectant. 0.2% phenol is antiseptic.
Dettol (antiseptic) is a mixture of chloroxylenol and terpineol.
Tincture of iodine (antiseptic) is a mixture of 2 – 3% Iodine solution in alcohol-water.

Disinfectants : The chemical compounds used for killing (or) preventing the growth of microorganism are called disinfectants.

  1. These are applied to inanimate objects like floors, drainage systems etc…
    E.g.: 4% aqueous solution of formaldehyde called formalin is a disinfectant.
  2. 0.3 ppm chlorine aqueous solution is disinfectant.
  3. SO2 in very low concentration is disinfectant.

Phenol is used as antiseptic as well as disinfectant 1% phenol is disinfectant.

Question 12.
How do antiseptics differ from disinfectants ? Does the same substance be used as both ? Give one example for each.
Answer:
Antiseptics are the chemical substances applied on the living tissues such as wounds, cuts, ulcers and diseased skin surfaces.
Disinfectants are applied to inanimate objects such as floors, drainage system, instruments etc.
Phenol is used as antiseptic as well as disinfectant.
i) 0.2% phenol is antiseptic.
ii) 1% phenol is disinfectant.

  1. Examples of Antiseptics :
    • Dettol (antiseptic) is a mixture of chloroxylenol and terpineol.
    • Tincture of iodine (antiseptic) is a mixture of 2.3% Iodine solution in alcohol-water.
  2. Examples of disinfectants :
    • 4% aqueous solution of formaldehyde called formalin is a disinfectant.
    • 0.3 ppm chlorine aqueous solution is disinfectant.
    • SO2 in very low concentration is disinfectant.

Phenol is used as anti in very low concentration is disinfectant.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 13.
What are the main categories of food additives ?
Answer:
The following are the categories of food additives.

  1. Food colours
  2. Flavours and sweetners
  3. Fat Emulsifiers and stabilising agents
  4. Anti oxidants
  5. Flour improvers – antistaling agents and bleaches
  6. Preservatives
  7. Nutritional supplements such as minerals, vitamins and amino acids.

Question 14.
Write notes on antioxidants in food.
Answer:
Antioxidants :

  • Antioxidants are important and necessary food additives.
  • Antioxidants help in food preservation by retarding the action of oxygen on food. Antioxidants are more reactive towards, oxygen than the food material which they protecting.
  • The most familiar antioxidants are Butylated hydroxy toluene (BHT) and Butylated hydroxy anisole (BHA).
  • The addition of BHA to butter increases its shelf life from months to years.
  • BHT and BHA along with citric acid are added to produce more antioxidant effect.
  • SO2 and sulphites are useful anti Oxidants for wine and beer, sugar syrups and cut, peeled (or) dried fruits and vegetables.

Question 15.
Name different types of soaps.
Answer:
The following are the different types of soaps.

  1. Toilet soaps
  2. Soaps that float in water
  3. Medicated soaps
  4. Shaving soaps
  5. Laundry soaps
  6. Soap powders and scouring soaps etc.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 16.
Explain the following terms with suitable examples.
i) Cationic detergents
ii) Anionic detergents
iii) Non-ionic detergents
Answer:
Synthetic detergents are classified into three types.
i) Cationic detergents : These are synthetic detergents.
a) Cationic detergents are quarternary ammonium salts of amines with acetates, chlorides (or) bromides as anions.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 4
b) Cationic part possess a long hydrocarbon chain and a positive charge on nitrogen atom. Hence these are called catiomc detergents.
E.g. : Cetyl trimethyl ammonium bromide
It is used in hair conditioners.

ii) Anionic Detergents: These are synthetic detergents.
a) Anionic detergents are sodium salts of sulphonated long chain alcohols (or) hydrocarbons.
b) Anionic detergents are formed by the treatment of long chain alcohols with conc. H2SO4 followed by the neutralisation with alkali.
E.g.: Sodium lauryl sulphate.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 5
These are used for house hold work and in tooth pastes.

iii) Non-ionic detergents : These are synthetic detergents.
a) Non-ionic detergents do not contain any ion in their constitution.
b) The detergent formed by the reaction of stearic acid with poly ethylene glycol is an example of non ionic detergent.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 6
Non-ionic detergents are used in liquid dish washing purpose.

Question 17.
What are biodegradable and non-bio degradable detergents ? Give one example for each.
Answer:

  1. Biodegradable detergents :
    The detergents which are degraded (or) decomposed by micro organisms are called biodegradable detergents. Biodegradable detergents have less branching.
    These do not cause water pollution.
    E.g.: n-dodecyle benzene sulphonate, soap (non synthetic),
  2. Non Biodegradable detergents :
    The detergents which are not decomposed (or) degraded by microbes (or) micro organisms are called non-biodegradable detergents. These have more branching.
    These cause water pollution.
    E.g.: ABS detergent.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 18.
Explain the cleansing action of soaps.
Answer:
Soap is sodium stearate, C17H35COONa, in water soap gives the ions stearate anion and sodium ion.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 7
Cleansing action of soap : Soap anions form a micelle. The grease or dirt of the cloth are absorbed into the interior of the micelle. The tails of the anion are pegged into micelle and these micelle are washed away with the soap solution.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 8
The main function of the soap is therefore, to convert the oily and greasy dirt on the cloth into large colloidal particles. For this a critical concentration of soap solution is required. Soap thus, functions as an emulsifying agent for the water – dirt emulsion. The emulsified grease or dirt is then washed away with soap solution.

Question 19.
Label the hydrophilic and. hydrophobic parts in the following compounds.
i) CH3 (CH2)10 CH2 OSO3 Na+
ii) CH3(CH2)15N+(CH3)3 Br
iii) CH3 (CH2)16 COO (CH2 CH2O)n CH2 CH2 OH
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 9

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 20.
Draw the structures of following:
i) Serotonin
ii) Bithionol
iii) Chloramphenicol
iv) saccharin
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 10
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 11

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Describe the classification of drugs into different classes.
Answer:
Classification of drugs : Drugs are classified in different ways.

  1. On the basis of drug action : Based on the actions of drugs on particular biochemical processes they are classified as
    • Antibacterials
    • Antibiotics
    • Hypnotics
    • Sedatives and tranquilizers
    • Cardio vascular drugs
    • Antiseptics etc.
  2. On the basis of molecular targets : Biomolecules like Carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, nucleic acids etc. react with drugs. These biomolecules are called drug targets or simply target molecules.
  3. On the basis of chemical structure : The drugs with some common structural features generally show similar pharmacological activity.
    E.g.: Sulfonamides have common structural feature.
    So they have same chemotherapeutic action.
  4. On the basis of pharmocological effect:
    This type of classification is useful for doctors because it provides them the whole range of drugs available for the treatment.
    E.g.: Analgesics have pair killing effect.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 2.
Describe briefly the therapeutic action of different classes of drugs.
Answer:
The therapeutic action of different classes of drugs discussed below.
Antacids : Chemicals that remove the excess of acid in the stomach and maintain the pH to normal level are antacids.
E.g. : Omeprazole, Lansoprazole etc.,

Antihistamines : Chemicals that prevent the interaction of histamines with receptors of the stomach wall thus producing less amount of acid are anti histamines.
E.g.: Dimetapp, Terfenadine (Seldane)

Tranquilizers : The drugs which are used in the management (or) treatment of psychoes and neuroses are called tranquilizers
E.g.: Luminal, Seconal, Barbituric acid etc.,

Barbiturates : Derivatives of barbituric acid which functions as important class of tranquilizers are called barbiturates
E.g.: Veronal, Amytal etc.,

Analgesics : These are to reduce or totally abolish pain without causing impairment of consciousness, mental confusion, incoordination, paralysis, disturbances of nervous system etc.
Analgesics are classified as

  1. Narcotic analgesics : These are most potent and clinically useful agents causing depression of central nervous system and at the same time act as strong analgesics.
    E.g.: Morphine, Codeine etc.
  2. Non-narcotic analgesics : These drugs are analgesics but they have no addictive properties. Their analgesic use is limited to mild aches and pains.
    E.g. : Aspirin, Ibuprofen etc.

Antimicrobials : The chemical substances which destroy (or) prevent the developement (or) inhibit the pathogenic action of microbes such as bacteria, fungi, virus are called antimicrobials. E.g.: Lysozyme, Lactic acid etc.,

Antibiotics: The chemical substances produced by micro Organisms and inhibit the growth or destroy microorganisms are called antibiotics. .
(Or)
The substance produced totally or partly by chemical synthesis in low concentration inhibits the growth (or) destroy microorganism by intervening in their metabolic process are called antibiotics.
E.g. : Penicillin, Chloramphenicol etc.

Antiseptics : The chemical compounds that kill (or) prevent the growth of micro organism are called antiseptics.
Antiseptics are the chemical substances applied on the living tissues such as wounds, cuts, ulcers and diseased skin surfaces.

Disinfectants : The chemical compounds used for killing (or) preventing the growth of microorganism are called disinfectants.
These are applied to inanimate objects like floors, drainage systems etc.
E.g.:

  1. 4% aqueous solution of formaldehyde called formalin is a disinfectant.
  2. 0.3 ppm chlorine aqueous solution is disinfectant.
  3. SO2 in very low concentration is disinfectant.

Antifertility drugs: These are birth control pills and contains a mixture of synthetic estrogen and progesterone derivatives.
E.g. : Norethindrone, Ethynylestradiol (novestrol).

Question 3.
Write an essay on antimicrobials.
Answer:
Antimicrobials : The chemical substances which destroy or prevent the developement (or) inhibit the pathogenic action of microbes such as bacteria, fungi, virus are called antimicrobials
E.g. : Lysozyme, Lactic acid etc.,
Different types of anti microbial drugs are antibiotics, antiseptics, disinfectants.

Question 4.
Write notes on the following : [T.S. Mar. 16]
i) Artificial sweetening agents
ii) Food preservatives
iii) Antioxidants in food.
Answer:
i) Artificial sweetening agents: The chemical substances which are used instead of sucrose (or) sugar are called artificial sweetening agents.
E.g.: Aspartame, Alitame, saccharin.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 12
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 13

  1. These decrease the calorific intake and at the same time several times sweeter than sucrose.
  2. Artificial sweetening agents are very useful to diabetic persons.
  3. These are harmless.
  4. Aspartame is unstable at cooking temperature so it’s use is limited to cold foods and soft drinks.
  5. The sweetening agent used in the preparation of sweets for a diabetic patient is saccharin (or) sucralose. It is stable at cooking tenperature.
  6. While using alitame as artificial sweetener, the control of sweetness of food is difficult. Alitame is a high potency sweetner.

ii) Food preservatives : The chemical substances which prevent the spoilage of food due to microbial growth are called food preservatives.
Sodium benzoate, C6H5COONa is the most important food preservative used in limited quantities and is metabolised by conversion into hippuricacid. Which is finally excreted in the urine. Salts of sorbicacid, propionic acid are also food presevatives.

iii) Antioxidants :

  1. Antioxidants are important and necessary food additives.
  2. Antioxidants help in food preservation by retarding the action of oxygen on food.
  3. Antioxidants are more reactive towards oxygen than the food material which they protecting.
  4. The most familiar anti oxidants are Butylated hydroxy toluene (BHT) and Butylated hydroxy anisole (BHA).
  5. The addition of BHA to butter increases its shelf life from months to years.
  6. BHT and BHA along with citric acid are added to produce more antioxidant effect.
  7. SO2 and sulphits are useful anti oxidants for wine and beer, sugar syrups and cut, peeled (or) dried fruits and vegetables.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 5.
Write notes on the following :
i) Soaps
ii) Synthetic detergents.
Answer:
i) Soaps : 1) Soaps are the detergents which improve cleansing properties of water and help in removal of fats which bind other materials to the fabric (or) skin.
Chemically soaps are sodium (or) potassium salts of long chain fatty acids.
E.g.: Sodium stearate.
The process of formation of soaps containing sodium salts by heating esters of fatty acid with aq. NaOH solution is called saponification.
Only sodium and potassium soaps are soluble in water and are used for cleaning purpose. Potassium soaps are soft to the skin and are prepared by using KOH instead of NaOH.

Types of soaps :
The following are the different types of soaps

  1. Toilet soaps
  2. Soaps that float in water
  3. Medicated soaps
  4. Shaving soaps
  5. Laundry soaps –
  6. Soap powders and scouring soaps etc.

In hard water Ca, Mg-dissolved salts are present. Ca+2, Mg+2 ions form insoluble Ca, Mg, soaps respectively when sodium (or) potassium soaps are dissolved in hard water.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 14

  1. These insoluble soaps separate as scum in water and are useless as cleansing agent. These are problematic to good washing because the ppt adheres into the fibres of cloth as gummy mass.
  2. Hair washed with hard water looks dull.
  3. Dye does not absorb evenly on cloth washed with soap using hard water due to this gummy mass.

ii) Synthetic detergents : The cleansing agents which are having all the properties of soaps but donot contain any soap are called synthetic detergents.
Synthetic detergents can be used both is soft and hardwater as they give foam even in hard water.
E.g. : Sodium dodecyl benzene sulphonate.
Soaps do not work in hard water but synthetic detegents can be used both in soft and hard water as they give foam even in hard water. Some of the detergents give foam even in ice cold water.

Synthetic Detergents are classified into three types :
i) Cationic detergents : These are synthetic detergents.
a) Cationic detergents are quarternary ammonium salts of amines with acetates, chlorides (or) bromides as anions.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 15
b) Cationic part possess a long hydrocarbon chain and a positive charge on nitrogen atom. Hence these are called cationic detergents.
E.g. : Cetyl trimethyl ammonium bromide.
It is used in hair conditioners.

ii) Anionic Detergents :
These are synthetic detergents.
a) Anionic detergents are sodium salts of sulphonated long chain alcohols (or) hydro-carbons.
b) Anionic detergents are formed by the treatment of long chain alcohols with cone, H2S04 followed by the neutralisation with alkali.
E.g. : Sodium lauryl sulphate.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 16
These are used for house hold work and in tooth pastes.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

iii) Non-ionic detergents : .
These are synthetic detergents.
a) Non-ionic detergents donot contain any ion in their constitution.
b) The detergent formed by the reaction of stearic acid with poly ethylene glycol is an example of non ionic detergent.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 17
Non-ionic detergents are used in liquid dish washing purpose.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Sleeping pills are recommended by doctors to the patients suffering from sleeplessness but it is not advisable to take its doses without consultation with the doctor. Why ?
• Consider the effect of tranquilizers or antidepressants on the nervous system.
Solution:
Sleeping pills contain drugs that may be tranquilizers or antidepressants. They affect the nervous system, relieve anxiety, stress, irritability or excitement. But they should strictly be used under the supervision of a doctor. If not, the uncontrolled and over dosage can cause harm to the body and mind because in higher doses these drugs act as poisons.

Question 2.
With reference to which classification has the statement, “ranitidine is an antacid” been given ?
Solution:
This statement refers to the classification of drugs according to pharmacological effect because in neutralizes the acidity (excess) of stomach.

Question 3.
Why do we require artificial sweetening agents ?
• Mention the function of natural sweeteners, discuss the same for artificial sweeteners.
Solution:
Natural sweeteners (sucrose etc.) provide calories to the body. Taking extra calories is harmful
for diabetic patients. So, artificial sweeteners are used
(a) to control intake of calories and
(b) as a substitute of sugar for diabetics.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life

Question 4.
Write the chemical equation for preparing sodium soap from glyceryl oleate and glyceryl palmitate. Structural formulae of these compounds are given below.
i) (C15H31COO)3 C3H5 – Glyceryl palmitate
ii) (C17H32COO)3 C3H5 – Glyceryl oleate
• Consider the following method.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 18
Solution:

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 19

Question 5.
Following types of non-ionic detergents are present in liquid detergents, emulsifying agents and wetting agents. Label the hydrophilic and hydrophobic parts in the molecule. Identify the functional group (s) present in the molecule.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 20
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 10 Chemistry In Everyday Life 21
(b) Functional group : Ether and alcohol.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 9th Lesson Biomolecules Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 9th Lesson Biomolecules

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define Carbohydrates.
Answer:
The compounds which are primarily produced by plants and form a very large group of naturally occurring organic compounds are called Carbohydrates.
Eg: Glucose, Fructose, Starch.
-H> Carbohydrates are the polyhydroxy aldehydes (or) ketones.

Question 2.
Name the different types of carbohydrates on the basis of their hydrolysis. Give one example for each.
Answer:
On the basis of the hydrolysis, carbohydrates are classified as

  1. Monosaccharides, Eg : Glucose, fructose AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 1 No saccharides
  2. Oligosaccharides, Eg : Sucrose, maltose AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 1 two monosaccharides
  3. Polysaccharides, Eg : Starch, cellulose AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 1 large number of monosaccharides.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 3.
Why are sugars classified as reducing and non-reducing sugars ?
Answer:
Carbohydrates that reduce Fehling’s reagent, Tollen’s reagent are called reducing sugars.
Eg: Glucose.
Carbohydrates that doesnot reduce Fehling’s reagent, Tollen’s reagent are called non reducing sugars.
Eg : Sucrose.

Question 4.
What do you understand from the names
(a) aldo pentose and
(b) ketoheptose ?
Answer:
a) Aldo pentose : If a monosaccharide contains 5 carbon atoms with aldehyde group then it is known as aldo pentose.
b) Ketoheptose : If a monosaccharide contain seven carbons with a ketone group then it is called ketoheptose.

Question 5.
Write two methods of preparation of glucose.
Answer:
Methods of preparations of glucose :
1) From Sucrose.: Sucrose when boiled with di/.HC/ in alcoholic solution then glucose, fructose are obtained in equal portions.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 2
2) From Starch : Starch undergo hydrolysis, with dil. H2S04 at 393K under pressure to form glucose.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 3

Question 6.
Glucose reacts with bromine water to give gluconic acid. What information do you get from this reaction about the structure of glucose ?
Answer:
Glucose reacts with bromine water to give gluconic acid. This reaction indicates that the carbonyl group present ip,glucose is an aldehyde group.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 4

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 7.
Glucose and gluconic acid on oxidation with nitric acid give saccharic acid. What Information do you get from this reaction about the structure of glucose ?
Answer:
Glucose and gluconic acid on oxidation with nitric acid give saccharic acid. This indicates the presence of primary alcoholic (-OH) group in glucose.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 5

Question 8.
Glucose reacts with acetic anhydride to form penta acetate. What do you understand about the structure of glucose from this reaction ?
Answer:
Glucose reacts with acetic anhydride to form peta acetate. It confirms the presence of five- OH groups in glucose which are attached to different carbon atoms.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 6

Question 9.
Give any two reasons to understand that glucose molecule has no open chain structure.
Answer:
Open chain structure of glucose could not explain

  • why glucose doesnot respond to Schiffs test,
  • why it does not react with NaHSO3 and NH3,
  • why there is mutarotation.

Question 10.
D – glucose means dextro rotatory glucose. Is it true ? Why ?
Answer:
In glucose the carbon atom attached to the lowest CH2-OH group is found to contain H atom on left side. So it is correlated to glyceraldehyde molecule and gives D-symbol. D-Glucose means not dextro rotatory glucose. D-symbol has nothing to do with optical activity of compound.

Question 11.
What are anomers ?
Answer:
Anomers : The two isomeric structures of a compound which differ in configuration at C-l only are called Anomers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 12.
Write the ring structure of D-glucose. What are their names?
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 7

Question 13.
Write the ring structure and open chain structure of fructose.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 8

Question 14.
What do you understand by invert sugars?
Answer:
During the hydrolysis of sucrose there is a change in the sign of rotation, from dextro (+) to laevo (-) and the product is named as invert sugar.

Question 15.
What are amino acids? Give two examples.
Answer:
The organic compounds which contain amino (-NH2) functional group and carboxyl (-COOH) functional group are called amino acids.
Eg: Glycine, Alanine etc.

Question 16.
Write the structure of alanine and aspartic acid.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 9

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 17.
What do you mean by essential amino acids ? Give two examples for non essential amino acids? [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Essential amino acids : The amino acids which cannot be synthesized in the body and must be obtained through diet are known as essential aminoacids.
Eg : valine,. leucine etc.
Examples of non essential amino acids are Alanine, glycine, Aspartic acid.

Question 18.
What is zwitter ion ? Give an example.
Answer:
Zwitter ion : In aqueous solution of amino acids, the carboxyl group can lose a proton and amino acid can accept that proton to form a dipolar ion. This ion is called as zwitter ion.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 10

Question 19.
What are proteins ? Give an example.
Answer:
Proteins : A poly peptide with more than hundred amino acid residues, having molecular mass higher than 10,000 units is called a protein.
Eg : keratin, myosin, insulin.

Question 20.
What are fibrous proteins ? Give examples.
Answer:
When the poly peptide chains run parallel and are held together by hydrogen and disulphide bonds then fibre – like structure is formed. These are called fibrous proteins. These are insoluble in water.
Eg : keratin, myosin.

Question 21.
What are globular proteins ? Give examples.
Answer:
When the chains of polypeptides coil around to give a spherical shape then globular proteins are formed. These are usually soluble in water.
Eg : insulin and albumins.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 22.
How are proteins classified with respect to peptide bond ?
Answer:
With respect to peptide bond proteins classified into two types.

  1. Fibrous proteins
  2. Globular proteins.

Question 23.
What are the components of a nucleic acid ?
Answer:

  • Nucleic acids are long chain polymers of nucleotides i.e poly nucleotides,
  • Nucleic acids are constituted by pentose sugar, phosphoric acid, and nitrogenous hetero cyclic base (purine (or) pyrimidine).

Question 24.
Write the names of three types of RNA.
Answer:
Three types of RNA are :

  1. Messenger RNA (m – RNA)
  2. Ribosomal RNA (r – RNA)
  3. Transfer RNA (t – RNA).

Question 25.
Write the biological functions of nucleic acids.
Answer:
Biological functions of Nucleic acids :

  • DNA is the chemical basis of heredity.
  • DNA is the reserve of genetic information.
  • DNA is capable of self duplication during cell division and identical DNA strands are transfered to daughter cells.
  • RNA molecules are used in the protein synthesis in the cell
  • The message for the synthesis of a protien is present in DNA.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 26.
Name the vitamin responsible for the coagulation of blood.
Answer:
The vitamin responsible for the coagulation of blood is vitamin K.

Question 27.
What are monosaccharides ?
Answer:
A carbohydrate which donot form any saccharide unit on hydrolysis (or) which cannot be hydrolysed is called monosaccharide.
Eg : glucose, fructose.

Question 28.
What are reducing sugars ?
Answer:
Carbohydrates that reduce Fehling’s reagent, Tollen’s reagent are called reducing sugars.
Eg : glucose.

Question 29.
Write two main functions of carbohydrates in plants.
Answer:
Carbohydrates are essential for life of plants.

  • Carbohydrates are used as storage molecules as starch in plants.
  • Cell wall of plants is made up of cellulose.

Question 30.
Classify the following into monosaccharides and disaccharides,

  1. ribose
  2. 2-deoxy ribose
  3. maltose
  4. fructose.

Answer:

  1. Ribose – Monosaccharide
  2. 2 – deoxy ribose – Monosaccharide
  3. Maltose – Disacch&ride .
  4. Fructose – Monosaccharide.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 31.
What do you understand by the term glycosidic linkage ?
Answer:
The linkage between two monosacharides of disacharides is called glycosidic linkage.

Question 32.
What is glycogen ? How is it different from starch ?
Answer:
The carbohydrate which is stored in animal body is called glycogen. It is also known as animal starch. Starch is a polysaccharide which is stored in plants where as glycogen is stored in animals (liver, muscles and brain).

  • Glycogen mainly resembles amylopectin of starch in structure but glycogen is more branched than amylopectin.

Question 33.
What are the hydrolysis products of
i) sucrose and
ii) lactose ?
Answer:
i) The hydrolysis products of sucrose are glucose and fructose.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 11
ii) The hydrolysis products of lactose are galactose and glucose.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 12

Question 34.
What is the basic structural difference between starch and cellulose ?
Answer:
In cellulose a straight chain polysaccharide composed only of β – D – glucose units which are joined by glycosidic linkage between C – 1 of one glucose unit and C – 4 of the next glucose unit.

Starch consists of two components – Amylose and Amylopectin. Amylose is a long un branched chain with 200 – 1000 α – D – glucose units held by C – 1 to C – 4 glycosidic linkage. Amylopectin is a branched chain polymer of α – D – glucose units in which Chain is formed by C – 1 to C – 4 glycosidic linkage where as branching occurs by C – 1 to C – 6 glycosidic linkage.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 35.
What happens when D – glucose is treated with the following reagents :
i) HI
ii) Bromine water
iii) HNOs.
Answer:
i) D – glucose on prolonged heating with HI, glucose forms n – hexane.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 13

Question 36.
Enumerate the reactions of D – glucose which cannot be explained by its open chain structure.
Answer:
The following reactions cannot be explained by the open chain structure of D – glucose.

  • Glucose has aldehyde group, but it does not respond to the reagents like Schiff s reagent, NaHSO3, NH3 etc., .
  • The penta acetyl derivative of glucose doesnot react with hydroxyl amine.
  • α and β – methyl glucosides cannot be explained by its open chain structure.

Question 37.
What are essential and non – essential amino acids ? Give one example for each.
Answer:
Essential amino acids : The amino acids that cannot be synthesised by the body and must be supplied in the diet are called essential amino acids.
Eg : valine, leucine, phenyl alanine etc.,

Non-essential amino acids : Other amino acids synthesised by the tissues of the body are called non-essential amino acids.
Eg : Glycine, alanine etc.,

Question 38.
Define the following as related to proteins :
i) Peptide linkage
ii) Primary structure
iii) Denaturation
Answer:
i) Peptide linkage :
Amide AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 14 linkages between amino acids are known as peptide linkages. The product obtained from two amino acid molecules through peptide bond is called a dipeptide. Peptide chain may be extended to many amino acids.

Proteins are naturally occuring polypeptides that contain more than 50 amino acid units.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 15

ii) Primary structure : The primary structure of protein is defined as the linear sequence of amino acid residues making up its polypeptide chain. Proteins may be formed of one or more polypeptide chains. The amino acid residues are linked by peptide bonds. The peptide bond is formed between carboxyl group of one amino acid and amino group of adjacent amino acid.
Eg : fibroin of silk.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 16

iii) Protein Denaturation : The phenomenon of disorganization of native protein structure is known as denaturation. Denaturation results in the loss of secondary, tertiary nad quaternary structure of proteins. This involves a change in physical, chemical and biological properties of protein molecules.
Agents of denaturation:
Physical agents – Heat, violent shaking, X – rays, UV – radiation
Chemical agents – Acids, alkalies, organic solvents, urea, salts of heavy metals.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 39.
What are the common types of secondary structure of proteins ?
Answer:
Secondary structure: The secondary structure explains the shape of the polypeptide chain. It is derived from the primary structure by the formation of hydrogen bond interactions between amino acid residues.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 17
Disulfide bonds also occur either in same chain or between polypeptide chains. The secondary structure is classified into two types namely helical structure and pleated sheets, e.g.: Keratin of hair.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 18

Question 40.
What type of bonding helps in stabilizing the α – helix structure of proteins ?
Answer:
The α – helix structure of proteins is stabilized by intramolecular hydrogen bonding between AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 19 = O and AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 20 – H groups of dlifferent peptide bonds.

Question 41.
Differentiate between globular and fibrous proteins.
Answer:
Globular proteins

  • In this proteins the chains of poly peptides coil around to give a spherical shape
  • These are soluble in water
  • Eg: Insulin

Fibrous proteins

  • In this proteins the poly peptides run parallel and are held together by hydrogens and disulphite – bondy
  • These are insoluble in water
  • Eg: keratin

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 42.
How do you explain the amphoteric behaviour of amino acids ?
Answer:
Amino acids are the compounds having amino group (-NH2) i.e., a basic group and carboxyl group (-COOH) i.e., an acidic group

Zwitter ion,: In aqueous solution of amino acids, the carboxyl group can lose a proton and amino acid can accept that proton to form a dipolar ion. This is called as zwitter ion.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 21
In zwitter ion form amino acids behave both acidic as well as basic nature. Therefore amino acids are amphoteric in nature.

Question 43.
Why are vitamin A and vitamin C essential to us ? Give their important sources.
Answer:
vitamin A and vitamin C are essential to us.
Explanation :

  • Deficiency of vitamin A causes night blindness, red ness in eyes, xerophthalhia
  • Deficiency of vitamin C causes pernicious anaemia (RBC deficient in haemoglobin)

Sources :

  • Vitamin – A : Fish liver oil, carrots, butter and milk.
  • Vitamin – C : Citrous fruits, amla, green leafy vegetables.

Question 44.
What are nucleic acids ? Mention their two important functions.
Answer:

  • Nucleic acids are long chain polymers of nucleotides i.e poly nucleotides.
  • Nucleic acids are constituted by pentose sugar, phosphoric acid, and nitrogenous hetero cyclic base (purine (or) pyrimidine).

Biological functions of Nucleic acids :

  • DNA is the chemical basis of heredity.
  • DNA is the reserve of genetic information.
  • DNA is capable of self duplication during cell division and identical DNA strands are transfered to daughter cells.
  • RNA molecules are used in the protein synthesis in the,cell.
  • The message for the synthesis of a protien is present in DNA.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 45.
What is the difference between a nucleoside and a nucleotide ?
Answer:
Nucleosides: Nucleic acid bases combine with pentose sugars to form N – glycosides known as nucleosides.
Eg: Cytidine
Structure of Cytidine
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 22
Nucleotides : Nucleotide is a phosphate ester of nucleoside and consists of a purine or pyrimidine base. Nucleotide contains a base moiety, a sugar moiety (i.e.,) a nucleoside moiety and phosphate group.
Nucleotide = base (purine / pyrimidine) + sugar (ribose/deoxyribose) + phosphate
Ex: Adenosine Triphosphate (ATP)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 23

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
How are the carbohydrates classified on the basis of their
a) Taste
b) Hydrolysis
c) Functional groups
Answer:
a) Taste : On the basis of their taste carbohydrates are classified into
i) Sugars, ii) Non sugars.

  1. Sugars : Carbohydrates which are sweet in taste.
    Eg : Sucrose.
  2. Non sugars : Carbohydrates which are not sweet in taste.
    Eg : Cellulose.

b) Hydrolysis : On the basis of the hydrolysis, carbohydrates are classified as

  1. Monosaccharides, Eg: Glucose, fructose AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 1 No saccharides
  2. Oligosaccharides. Eg: Sucrose, maltose AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 1 two monosaccharides
  3. Polysaccharides, Eg: Starch, cellulose AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 1 large number of monosacchandes.

c) Functional groups: Carbohydrates classified into two types on the basis of functional group present.

  1. Aldoses: Carbohydrates having aldehyde group.
    Eg: glucose.
  2. Ketoses: Carbohydrates having ketone group.
    Eg: fructose.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 2.
Write a brief note on the structure of glucose.
Answer:
1. The molecular formula of glucose is found to be C6H12O6. It can be written as CHO – (CHOH)4 – CH6OH’.

2. Acylation of glucose with acetic anhydride gives glucose pentacetate. Hence glucose molecule has five -OH groups.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 24

3. Glucose reacts with hydroxylamine and hydrogen cyanide forming corresponding oxime and cyano hydrin respectively. Hence glucose molecule has carbonyl group.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 25

4. Glucose on oxidation with Tollens reagent and Fehling’s solution gives gluconic acid. Hence carbonyl group present in glucose is aldehydic group.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 26

5. Glucose on oxidation with nitric acid gives glucaric (saccharic) acid. This suggests that glucose molecule has primary alcoholic group (-CH2OH).
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 27
6. On reduction with HI, glucose gives n – hexane.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 28

7. Open chain structure of glucose:
Based on above observations, glucose is given the open chain structure.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 29
8. Objections against open chain structure of glucose :
Open chain structure of glucose could not explain

  1. Why glucose does not respond to schiffs test.
  2. Why it does not react with NaH SO3, and NH3.
  3. Why there is mutarotation.

Mutarotation :
Change in specific rotation of a compound from certain value to fixed value is known as “Mutarotation”.
The specific rotation of α – glucose is + 110° and that of β – form is + 19.7°. If each of them is separately dissolved in water and allowed to stand, their specific rotation gradually change and reach to a specific constant value + 52.5°.

9. Cyclic structure of glucose :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 30
These two structures have difference in configuration at ‘C1‘ only and are called ANOMERS.
Cyclic structure of glucose explains all the properties of glucose.

10. Pyranose structure of glucose :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 31

Question 3.
Write short notes on sucrose.
Answer:
Sucrose is a disaccharide. It under go hydrolysis and forms equimolar mixture of D(+) glucose and D(-) fructose.
C12 H22 O11 + H12O → C6 H12 O6 (glucose) + C6 H12 O6 (fructose).

  • In sucrose two monosaccharide units are held together by a glycosidic linkage between C – 1 of α – glucose and C – 2 of β – glucose.
  • Sucrose is a non reducing sugar.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 32
    During the hydrolysis of sucrose there is a change in the sign of rotation, from dextro (+) to laevo (-) and the product is named as invert sugar.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 4.
Write the structure of maltose and lactose. What are the products of hydrolysis of maltose and lactose?
Answer:
Structure of maltose:

  • Maltose is formed from two α – glucose units (Disaccharide)
  • C – 1 of one glucose linked to C -4 of another glucose
  • It is a reducing sugar because C – 1 of 2nd glucose is solution have free aldehyde group.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 33
  • maltose on hydrolysis to form two glucose units
    C12 H22 O11 (Maltose) + H2O → C6H12O6 (glucose) + C6H12O6 (glucose)

Structure of lactose:

  • Lactose is milk sugar.
  • Lactose is formed by the combination of β – glucose and β – galactose (Disaccharide)
  • The linkage between C – 1 of galactose and c – 4 of glucose.
  • It is a reducing sugar.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 34
  • Lactose on hydrolysis to form glucose and galactose
    C12 H22 O11 (Lactose) + H2O → C6H12O6 (glucose) + C6H12O6 (galactose)

Question 5.
Write about polysaccharides with starch and cellulose as examples.
Answer:
Polysaccharides : The saccharides which on hydrolysis to form large number of monosaccharides are called polysaccharides.
Eg : Starch and cellulose Starch :

  • Starch is the most important dietary source for human beings.
  • Vegetables, roots, cereals are important sources of starch.
  • It is a polymer of α – glucose.
  • It is constituted by two components Amylose and amylopectin.

Amylose :

  • It constitutes 15 – 20% of starch.
  • Amylose is water soluble component.
  • Amylose is a branched chain with 200 – 1000 α – D – glucose units held by C – 1 to C -4 glycosidic linkage.

Amylopectin:

  • Amylopectin constitutes 80 – 85% of starch.
  • It is a branched chain polymer of a – glucose units in which chain is formed by C – 1 to C – 4 glycosidic linkage whereas branching occurs by C – 1 to C – 6 glycosidic linkage.

Cellulose :

  • ellulose occurs in plants and it is the most abundant organic substance.
  • It is a major constituent of cell wall of plant cells.
  • Cellulose is a straight chain polysaccharide composed only of β – D – glucose units which are joined by glycosidic linkage between C – 1 of one glucose and C – 4 of the next glucose.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 6.
Write the importance of carbohydrates.
Answer:
Importance of carbohydrates :

  • Carbohydrates are essential for life of plants.
  • Carbohydrates are used as storage molecules as starch in plants.
  • Cell wall of plants is made up of cellulose.
  • Carbohydrates are also essential for life of animals. Carbohydrates are used as storage molecules as glycogen in animals.
  • Carbohydrate source hohey is used for a long time as an instant source of energy.

Question 7.
Explain the classification of proteins as primary, secondary, tertiary and quartemary proteins with respect ot their structure.
Answer:
Protein structure’s and shapes are studied at four different levels as
i) Primary ii) Secondary iii) Tertiary iv) Quaternary structures

i) Primary structure : The primary structure of protein is defined as the linear sequence of amino acid residues making up its polypeptide chain. Proteins ‘may be formed of one or more polypeptide chains. The amino acid residues are linked by peptide bonds. The peptide bond is formed between carboxyl group of one amino acid and amino group of adjacent amino acid.
Eg : fibroin of silk.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 35
R1 – amino acid 1
R2 – amino acid 2

ii) Secondary structure : The secondary structure explains the shape of the polypeptide chain. It is derived from the primary structure by the formation of hydrogen bond interactions between amino acid residues.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 36
Disulfide bonds also occur either in same chain or between polypeptide chains. The secondary structure is classified into two types namely helical structure and pleated sheets.
Eg. : Keratin of hair
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 37

iii) Tertiary structure : Tertiary structure is exhibited by proteins having only one polypeptide chain. The three dimensional structure of a protein is referred to as tertiary structures. Fibrous and globular proteins are formed by tertiary structures. Various bonds are responsible for tertiary structure.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 38

  • Hydrophobic interactions
  • Hydrogen bonds
  • Disulphide bonds (- CH2 – S – S – CH2 -)
  • Ionic or electrostatic interactions
  • Vander Waal forces
    e.g : Myoglobin, Ribonuclease

iv) Quaternary structure : Two or more poly- peptide chains associate together to protect quaternary structure. A protein with a quaternary structure is referred to as an oligomes.
Eg. : Hemoglobin a chain
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 39

Question 8.
Explain the denaturation of proteins. [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
The phenomenon of disorganization of native protein structure is known as denaturation. Denaturation results in the loss of secondary, tertiary and quaternary structure of proteins. This involves a change in physical, chemical and biological properties of protein molecules.
Agents of denaturation :
Physical Agents – Heat, violent shaking, X – rays, UV – radiation.
Chemical Agents – Acids, alkalies, organic solvents, urea, salts of heavy metals.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 9.
What are enzymes ? Give examples ?
Answer:
The group of complex proteinoid organic compounds, elaborated by living organism ‘which catalyse specific organic reactions are called enzymes.
Eg.: Lipases, Rennin, Maltase, Invertase etc. Practic ally all biological processes such as digestion, respiration etc., are carried on through the agency of enzymes.
Enzymes may be defined as biocatalysts synthesised by living cells.
The functional unit of enzyme is known as holo enzyme made up at apo enzyme (protein part) a co enzyme (non-protein part)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 40

Question 10.
Explain the role of sucrose in its hydrolysis.
Answer:

  • Sucrose is dextrorotatory but after hydrolysis gives dextrorotatory glucose and laevorotatory fructose.
  • The laevorotation of fructose (-92.4°) is more than dextrorotation of glucose (+52.5°). This mixture is leavo rotators.
  • During the hydrolysis of sucrose there is a change in the sign of rotation, from dextro (+) to laevo (-) and the product is named as invert sugar.

Question 11.
Write notes on vitamins.
Answer:
Vitamin is defined as an “accessory food factor which is essential for growth and healthy maintenance of the body.”
Classification : Vitamins are broadly classified into two major groups.
a) the fat soluble Eg : vitamin A, D, E and K.
b) water soluble Eg : vitamin B – complex and C.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 41
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 42

Question 12.
What do you understand by “The two strands of DNA are complementary to each other” ? Explain.
Answer:
Structure of DNA : To understand the structure of DNA, we should know the charagaff s rule, which states that:

  • Base composition on DNA for a particular organism is constant throughout all the somatic cells.
  • Base composition always varies from one organism to another and is expressed by the dissymmetry ratio \(\frac{(A+T)}{(G+C)}\).
  • Organisms closely related to each other often have similar base composition and hence – have closed values for their dissymmetry ratios.
  • In a given organism the amount of adenine is always equal to the amount of thymine (A = T) and amount of guanine is equal to amount of cytosine (G = C).
  • In a given organism the total amount of purine, bases
    are always equal to total number of pyrimidine bases (i.e.,) (A + G = T + C).
    M. Wilkins found that within the crystal there is a repeat distance of 3.4 nm and there are ten subunits per him.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 43

Watson – Crick model for DNA : From the above observations Watson and Crick constructed a model for DNA. This model consists of two right handed polynucleotide chains that are complimentary and coiled about the same axis to form double-helix. Some specific base pairs can be spatially accommodated and these are A – T and G – C pairs. The bases are closely associated with each other by hydrogen bonding.

The helix has diameter of about 2.0 nm and contains 10 nucleotide pairs in each turn of helix as shown above :

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 13.
What are harmones ? Give one example for each. [A.P. & T.S. Mar. 19, 18] [Mar. 14]
i) steroid hormones
ii) Poly peptide hormones and
iii) amino acid derivatives.
Answer:
Hormones : Hormone is defined as an “organic compound synthesised by the ductless glands of the body and carried by the blood stream to another part of the body for its function”.
Eg : testosterone, estrogen.

  1. Example for steroid hormones : Testosterone, Estrogen
  2. Example for poly peptide hormones : Insulin
  3. Example for Amino acid derivative : Thyroidal hormones thyroxine.

Question 14.
Give the sources of the following vitamins and name the diseases caused by their deficiency (a) A (b) D (c) E and (d) K [A.P. Mar. 16, 15; T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 44

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain the classification of carbohydrates.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 45
Saccharides that reduce Fehling’s reagent, Tollen’s reagent are called reducing sugars.
Eg : glucose.
Saccharides that does not reduce these reagents are called non-reducing sugars.
Eg : sucrose.

Question 2.
Discuss the structure of glucose on the basis of its chemical propeties.
Answer:
1. The molecular formula of glucose is found to be C6H12O6. It can be written as ‘CHO – (CHOH)4 – CH2OH’.

2. Acylation of glucose with acetic anhydride gives glucose pentacetate. Hence glucose molecule has five ‘-OH’ groups.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 46

3. Glucose reacts with hydroxylamine and hydrogen cyanide forming corresponding oxime and cyano hydrin respectively. Hence glucose molecule has carbonyl group.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 47

4. Glucose on oxidation with Tollen’s reagent and Fehling’s solution gives gluconic acid. Hence carbonyl group present in glucose is aldehydic group.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 48

5. Glucose on oxidation with nitric acid gives glucaric’(saccharic) acid. This suggests that glucose molecule has primary alcoholic group (-CH2OH)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 49

6. On reduction with HI, glucose gives n – hexane.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 50
This reaction suggests that all six carbons in glucose are linearly linked.

7. Open chain structure of glucose:
Based on above observations, glucose is given the open chain structure.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 51

8. Objections against open chain structure of glucose :
Open chain structure of glucose could not explain

  1. Why glucose does not respond to schiff s test.
  2. Why it does not react with NaHSO3 and NH3.
  3. Why there is mutarotation.

Mutarotation :
Change in specific rotation of a compound from certain value to fixed value is known as “Mutarotation”.
The specific rotation of α – glucose is + 110° and that of β – form is + 19.7°. If each of them is separately dissolved in water and allowed to stand, their specific rotation gradually change and reach to a specific constant value + 52.5°.

9. Cyclic structure of glucose :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 52
These two structures have difference in configuration at ‘C1‘ only and are called
ANOMERS.
Cyclic structure of glucose explains all the properties of glucose.

10. Pyranose structure of glucose :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 53

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 2.
Write notes on
a) fructose
b) sucrose
c) maltose
d) lactose
Answer:
a) Fructose :

  • Fructose is an important ketohexose.
  • It is formed by the hydrolysis of sucrose.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 54
  • It has the ketonic group at C – 2 and six carbons in straight chain as in the glucose.
  • It has furanose ring structure.
  • Open chain structures:
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 55
    α – D (-) – Fructo furanose structure
    β – D (-) – Fructo furanose structure
    Haworth structures :
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 56

b) Sucrose :
Sucrose is a disaccharide. It under go hydrolysis and forms equimolar mixture of D(+) – glucose arid D(-) fructose.
C12 H22 O11 + H2O → C6 H12 O6 (glucose ) + C6 H12 O6 (fructose)

In sucrose two monosaccharide units are held together by a glycosidic linkage between C- 1 of α – glucose and C – 2 of β – glucose.

Sucrose is a non reducing sugar.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 57
During the hydrolysis of sucrose there is a change in the sign of rotation, from dextro (+) to laevo (-) and the product is named as invert sugar.

c) Structure of maltose :
Maltose is formed from two α – glucose units (Disaccharide)
C – 1 of one glucose linked to C – 4 of another glucose
It is a reducing sugar because C – 1 of 2nd glucose is solution have free aldehyde group.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 58
maltose on hydrolysis to form two glucose units
C12 H22 O11 (Maltose) + H2O → C6 H12 O6 (Glucose ) + C6 H12 O6 (Glucose)

d) Structure of lactose :

  • Lactose is milk sugar
  • Lactose is formed by the combination of β – glucose and β – galactose (Disaccharide).
  • The linkage between C – 1 of galactose and c – 4 of glucose >
  • It is a reducing sugar
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 59
  • Lactose on hydrolysis to form glucose and galactose
    C12 H22 O11 (Lactose) + H2O → C6 H12 O6 (glucose ) + C6 H12 O6 (galactose)

Question 3.
Write notes on
a) starch
b) cellulose
c) importance of carbohydrates.
Answer:
a) Starch:
Polysaccharides : The saccharides which on hydrolysis to form large number of monosaccharides are called polysaccharides.
Eg : Starch and cellulose Starch :

  • Starch is the most important dietary source for human beings.
  • Vegetables, roots, cereals are important sources of starch.
  • It is a polymer of a – glucose.
  • It is constituted by two components Amylose and amylopectin

Amylose :

  • It constitutes 15 – 20% of starch -4 Anylose is water soluble component.
  • Amylose is a branched chain with 200 – 1000 α – D – glucose units held by C – 1 to C – 4 glycosidic linkage.

Amylopectin :

  • Amylopectin constitutes 80 – 85% of starch.
  • It is a branched chain polymer of a – glucose units in which chain is formed by C – 1 to C – 4 glycosidic linkage whereas branching occurs by C – 1 to C – 6 glycosidic linkage.

b) Cellulose :

  • Cellulose occurs in plants and it is the most abundant organic substance.
  • It is a major constituent of cell wall of plant cells.
  • Cellulose is a straight chain polysaccharide composed only of β – D – glucose units – which are joined by glycosidic linkage between C – 1 of one glucose and C – 4 of the next glucose.

c) Importance of carbohydrates :

  • Carbohydrates are essential for life of plants.
  • Carbohydrates are used as storage molecules as starch in plants.
  • Cell wall of plants is made up of cellulose.
  • Carbohydrates are also essential for life of animals. Carbohydrates are used as storage molecules as glycogen in animals.
  • Carbohydrate source honey is used for a long time as an instant source of energy.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 4.
Write notes on amino acids.
Answer:
The organic compounds which contain amino (-NH2) functional group and carboxyl (-COOH) functional group are called amino acids.
Eg : Glycine, Alanine etc.

Essential amino acids : The amino acids that cannot be synthesised by the body and must be supplied in the diet are called essential amino acids.
Eg : valine, leucine, phenyl alanine etc.,

Non-essential amino acids : Other amino acids synthesised by the tissues of the body are called non-essential amino acids.
Eg : Glycine, alanine etc.,

Zwitter ion : In aqueous solution Of amino acids, the carboxyl group can lose a proton and amino acid can accept that proton to form a dipolar ion. This is called as zwitter ion.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 60

Peptide linkage :
Amide AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 61 linkages between amino acids are known as peptide linkages. The product obtained from two amino acid molecules through peptide bond is called a dipeptide. Peptide chain may be extended to many amino acids.
Proteins are naturally occufing polypeptides that contain more than 50 amino acid units.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 62

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 5.
Write notes on proteins.
Answer:
Proteins : A poly peptide with more than hundred amino acid residues, having molecular mass higher than 10,000 units is called a protein.
g : keratin, myosin, insulin.
With respect to peptide bond proteins classified into two types.

  1. Fibrous proteins
  2. Globular proteins.

When the chains of polypeptides coil around to give a spherical shape then globular proteins are formed. These are usually soluble in water.
Eg : insulin and albumins.

When the poiy peptide chains run parallel and are held together by hydrogen and disulphide bonds then fibre – like structure is formed. These are called fibrous proteins. These are insoluble in water.
Eg: keratin, myosin.

Protein Denaturation: The phenomenon of disorganization of native protein structure is known as denaturation. Denaturation results in the loss of secondary; tertiary,. nad quaternary structure of proteins. This involves a change in physical, chemical and biological properties of protein molecules.

Agents of denaturation:
Physical agents – Heat, violent shaking, X – rays, Uy – radiation
Chemical agents – Acids, alkalies, organic solvénts, urea, salts of heavy metals.
Protein strúctures and shapes are studied at four different levels as:
i) Primary
ii) Secondary
iii) Tertiary
iv) Quaternary structures

i) Primary structure: The primary structure of protein is defined as the linear sequence of amino acid residues making up its polypeptide chain. Proteins may be formed of one or more polypeptide chains. The amino acid residues are linked by peptide bonds, The peptide bond is formed between carboxyl group of one amino açid and amino group of adjacent amino acid.
Eg: fibroin of silk.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 63
R1 – amino acid 1
R2 – amino acid 2

ii) Secondary structure : The secondary structure explains the shape of the polypeptide chain. It is derived from the primary structure by the formation of hydrogen bond interactions between amino acid residues.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 36
Disulfide bonds also occur either in same chain or between polypeptide chains. The secondary structure is classified into two types namely helical structure and pleated sheets.
Eg. : Keratin of hair
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 37

iii) Tertiary structure i Tertiary structure is exhibited by proteins having only one polypeptide chain. The three dimensional structure of a protein is referred to as tertiary structures. Fibrous and globular proteins are formed by tertiary structures. Various bonds are responsible for tertiary structure.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 38

  1. Hydrophobic interactions
  2. Hydrogen bonds
  3. Disulphide bonds (- CH2 – S – S – CH2 -)
  4. Ionic or electrostatic interactions
  5. Vander Waal forces
    e.g : Myoglobin, Ribonuclease

iv) Quaternary structure : Two or more poly- peptide chains associate together to protect quaternary structure. A protein with a quaternary structure is referred to as an oligomes.
Eg. : Hemoglobin a chain
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 39

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 6.
Write notes on
(a) enzymes and
(b) vitamins.
Answer:
Enzymes :
The group of complex proteinoid organic compounds, elaborated by living organism which catalyse specific organic reactions are called enzymes. Eg.: Lipases, Rennin, Maltase, Invertase etc. Practically all biological processes such as digestion, respiration etc., are carried on through the agency of enzymes.
Enzymes may be defined as biocatalysts synthesised by living cells.
The functional unit of enzyme is known as holo enzyme made up at apo enzyme (protein part) and co enzyme (non-protein part)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 64
b) Vitamins :
Vitamin is defined as an “accessory food factor which is essential for growth and healthy maintenance of the body.”
Classification : Vitamins are broadly classified into two major groups.
a) the fat soluble Eg : vitamin A, D, E and K.
b) water soluble Eg : vitamin B – complex and C.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 41
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 42

Question 7.
Explain the structures of DNA and RNA.
Answer:
Structure of DNA : To understand the structure of DNA, we should know the charagaff s rule, which states that :

  1. Base composition on DNA for a particular organism is constant throughout all the somatic cells.
  2. Base composition always varies from one organism to another and is expressed by the dissymmetry ratio \(\frac{(\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{T})}{(\mathrm{G}+\mathrm{C})}\)
  3. Organisms closely related to each other often have similar base composition and hence have closed values for their dissymmetry ratios.
  4. In a given organism the amount of adenine is always equal to the amount of thymine (A = T) and amount of guanine is equal to amount of cytosine (G = C).
  5.  In a given organism the total amount of purine bases are always equal to total number of pyrimidine bases (i.e.,) (A + G = T + C).

M. Wilkins found that within the crystal there is a repeat distance of 3.4 nm and there are ten subunits per turn.

Watson – Crick model for DNA : From the above observations Watson and Crick constructed a model for DNA.
This model consists of two right handed polynucleotide chains that are complimentary and coiled about the same axis to form double-helix. Some specific base pairs can be spatially accommodated and these are A – T and G – C pairs. The bases are closely associated with each other by hydrogen bonding.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 43
The helix has diameter of about 2.0 nm and contains 10 nucleotide pairs in each turn of helix as shown above :

Structure of RNA: The native RNA is single stranded rather than a double stranded helical structure characteristic of DNA. However, given the complementary base sequence with opposite polarity, the single strand of RNA may fold back on itself like a hairpin and thus acquire double stranded pattern. In the region of hairpin loops, “A” pairs with ‘U’ and ‘G’ pairs with ‘C’. The base pairing in RNA hairpins is frequently imperfect. The proportion of helical regions in various types of RNA varies over a wide range.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 65

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 8.
Write notes on the functions of different hormones in the body.
Answer:
Functions of Hormones :

  • Hormones help to maintain the balance of biological activities in the body.
  • Insulin maintains the blood glucose level with in the limit.
  • Growth hormones and sex hormones play role in growth and development.
  • Low level of thyroxine (produced from thyroid gland) causes hypothyroidism. High level of thyroxine causes hyper thyroidism. .
  • gluco corticoids control the carbohydrate metabolism, modulates the inflammatory reactions.
  • The mineralo corticoids control the level of excretion of water and salt by the kidney.
  • Adrenal cortex does not function properly then results in Addison’s disease.
  • Hormones released by gonads are responsible for development of secondary sex characters.
  • Testosterone is responsible for development of secondary sex hormone produced in male.
  • Estradiol is the main female sex hormone responsible for development of secondary female characterstics like control of menustrual cycle.
  • Progesterone is responsible for preparing the uterus for implantation of fertilised egg.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Glucose or sucrose are soluble in water but cyclohexane and benzene (simple six membered ring compounds) are insoluble in water. Explain.
Answer:
In glucose (C6H12O6), 5 – OH groups are present and in sucrose (C12H22O11), B – OH groups are present, which are polar in nature. They are involved in intermolecular hydrogen bonding with water molecules, so these compounds are readily soluble in water.

Benzene (C6H6) and cyclohexame (C6H12) are hydrocarbons. They do not have any polar group so they cannot make hydrogen bonds with water. Therefore, they are insoluble in water.

Question 2.
What are the expected products of hydrolysis of lactose ?
Answer:
Lactose forms two molecules of monosaccharides on hydrolysis – One molecule of D-(+) – glucose and one molecule of D – (+) – galactose.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 66

Question 3.
How do you explain the formation of furanose structure for fructose while glucose forms pyranose structure with same molecular formula C6H12O6 ?
Answer:
D-glucose, an aldohexose given the characteristic reactions of aldehydic group (e.g., with HCN Tollen’s reagent, Fehling reagent etc.,) but penta acetae of D-glucose does not give these reactions. It means that either – CHO group is absent or it is not available for the chemical reactions in penta acetyl glucose. Infact, the aldehydic group is a part of hemiacetal structure which penta acetyl glucose has. So, it is not available for reaction.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules 67

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 4.
The melting points and solubility in water of amino acids are generally higher than that of the corresponding halo acids. Explain.
Higher the polarity of a group, more is its solubility in water.
Answer:
Amino acids are dipolar in nature (N+ H3 – CHR – COO) and have strong dipolar interatctions.
Therefore, these have high melting points. When dissolved in water, these form hydrogen bonds with water molecules, therefore, these are soluble in water, (except at isoelectric point, where they have least solubility) In case of halo acids, these are not dipolar. Only their carboxyl group is involved in hydrogen bonding, not the halogen atom. Therefore, halo acids, have lower melting points and lesser solubility than amino acids.

Question 5.
Why cannot vitamin C be stored in our body ?
Answer:
VitaminC (ascorbic acid) is water soluble. Therefore, it is regularly excreted in urine from the body and cannot be stored.

Question 6.
What products would be formed when a nucleotide from DNA containing thymine is hydrolysed ?
Give the composition of DNA molecule as on hydrolysis it gives its all constituents.
Answer:
When a nucleotide from DNA is hydrolysed, it will give deoxyribose sugar molecules, phosphoric acid, pyrimidine bases, i.e., guanine (G) and adenine (A) and purine bases, i.e., thymine (T) and cytosine (C).

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 9 Biomolecules

Question 7.
When RNA is hydrolysed, there is no relationship among the quantities of different bases obtained. What does this fact suggest about the structure of RNA ?
Single stranded structure of RNA.
Answer:
DNA molecule has a double strand structure and four complementary bases paired with each other. Cytosine (C) pairs with guanine (G) while thymine (T) pairs with adenine (A). Due to such structure, DNA produces the products in definite molar ratio.

The case is not same in RNA, ie., base pairing rule is not followed. Thus, when RNA is hydrolysed, the quantities of different bases are different. This suggests that RNA has single stranded structure.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 8th Lesson Polymers Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 8th Lesson Polymers

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define the terms monomer and polymer.
Answer:
Monomer: The repeating structural units of polymer which are derived from simple and reactive molecules linked to one another by covalent bonds are called monomers.
Polymer: A large molecular weight complex compound that is formed by the repeated combination of simple units (monomers) is called a polymer.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 2.
What are polymers? Give example.
Answer:
Polymer : A large molecular weight complex compound which is formed by the repeated combination of simple units (monomers) is called polymer.
E.g. : Nylon 6, 6, Buna-S,. rubber etc…..

Question 3.
What is polymerization ? Give an example of polymerization reaction.
Answer:
Polymerization: The process of formation of polymers from respective monomers is called polymerization.
(or)
A large molecular weight complex compound which is formed by the repeated combination of simple units is called polymer. This process is called polymerisation.
E.g. : Formation of polyethene from ethene and reaction of hexamethylene diamihe and adipic acid leading to the formation of Nylon 6, 6 are examples of two different types of polymerisation reactions.

Question 4.
Give one example each for synthetic and semi-synthetic polymers.
Answer:
Examples of synthetic polymers : Neoprene, Buna-S, Buna-N
Examples of Semi synthetic polymers : Cellulose rayon, cellulose nitrate.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 5.
How are the polymers classified on the basis of structure ?
Answer:
On the basis of structure, polymers are classified into three types :

  1. Linear polymers : These contains long and straight chains.
    E.g.: PVC, polythene (high density) etc.
  2. Branched chain polymers : These contains linear chains having some branches.
    E.g.: low density polythene.
  3. Cross linked polymers (or) Network polymers : These are usually formed from bi functional and tri functional monomers and contain strong covalent bonds between various linear polymer chains.
    E.g.: Bakelite, melamine etc. .

Question 6.
Give one example each for linear and branched chain polymers.
Answer:

  1. Linear polymers : These contains long and straight chains.
    E.g.: PVC, polythene (high density) etc.
  2. Branched chain polymers : These contains linear chains having some branches.
    E.g. : low density polythene.

Question 7.
What are cross linked (or network) polymers ? Give example.
Answer:
Cross linked polymers (or) Network polymers: These are usually formed from bi functional and tri functional monomers and contain strong covalent bonds between various linear polymer chains. E.g. : Bakelite, melamine etc.

Question 8.
What is addition polymer ? Give example. [T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Addition Polymer: The polymer which is formed by the addition of molecules of monomers of same type (or) different type containing double bonds is called addition polymer.
E.g.: Polyethene, poly acrylonitrile.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 9.
What is condensation polymer ? Give example.
Answer:
Condensation polymer : The polymer which is formed by the condensation reaction between molecules having more than one functional group is called condensation polymer.
E.g.: Nylon 6, 6, Poly ethylene terephthalate.

Question 10.
What are homopolymers ? Give example.
Answer:
Homopolymers : The polymers which are formed by the polymerisation of a single monomeric species are known as homopolymers. E.g.: Polyethene, Poly styrene.

Question 11.
What are copolymers ? Give example.
Answer:
Copolymers : A polymer which is formed by the polymerisation of two (or) more chemically different types of monomer units is called copolymer. E.g.: Butadiene – Styrene polymer (Buna-S)

Question 12.
Is – [-CH2 – CH (C6H5)-]n – a homopolymer or a copolymer ?
Answer:
-[-CH2 – CH (C6H5-]n is polystyrene. It is a homopolymer.
It is formed by the polymerisation of single monomer styrene.
(C6H5 – CH = CH2)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 13.
Is (NH – CHR- CO)n a homopolymer or a copolymer ?
Answer:
[NH – CHR – CO]n is a homopolymer. It is formed by the polymerisation of single monomer a-amino acid (NH2 – CHR-COOH).

Question 14.
What are the classes of the polymer based on molecular forces ?
Answer:
On the basis of molecular forces polymers are classified into four types.

  1. Elastomers: These are rubber like solids with elastic properties.
    E.g.: Buna-S, Buna-N.
  2. Fibres : Fibres are the thread forming Solids which possess high tensile strength.
    E.g. : Nylon 6, 6, polyesters
  3. Thermoplastic Polymers : These are the linear (or) slightly branched long chain
    molecules capable of softening on heating and hardening on cooling.
    E.g.: Polystyrene, polythene.
  4. Thermo setting polymers : These polymers are cross linked (or) heavily branched molecules which on heating undergo extensive cross linking in moulds and again become infusible.
    E.g. : Bakelite, urea-formaldehyde resin etc….

Question 15.
What are elastomers ? Give example. .
Answer:
Elastomers: These are rubber like solids with elastic properties. In elastomers the polymer chains are held together by the weak inter molecular forces.
E.g.: Buna – S, Buna – N etc.

Question 16.
What are fibres ? Give example.
Answer:
Fibres : Fibres are the thread forming solids which possess high tensile strength.
E.g.: Nylon 6, 6, polyesters

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 17.
What are thermoplastic polymers ? Give example.
Answer:
Thermoplastic Polymers: These are the linear (or) slightly branched long chain molecules capable of softening on heating and hardening on cooling.
E.g.: Polystyrene, polythene.

Question 18.
What are thermosetting polymers ? Give example.
Answer:
Thermo setting polymers: These polymers are cross linked (or) heavily branched molecules which on heating undergo extensive cross linking in moulds and again become infusible.
E.g.: Bakelite, urea-formaldehyde resin etc….

Question 19.
Write the name and structure of one of the common initiators used in free radical polymerization reaction.
Answer:
One of the common initiator used in free radical – polymerisation reaction is benzoyl peroxide.
Structure:
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 1

Question 20.
How can you differentiate between addition and condensation polymerization?
Answer:

Addition polymerisation

  1. Monomers used are unsaturated com­pounds.
  2. Polymer formation takes place without loss of atoms (or) groups.
  3. It is chain growth polymerisation.
  4. These polymers are called addition (or) ‘ chain (or) vinyl polymers.

Condensation polymerisation

  1. Monomers are bifunctional, tri-functional compounds.
  2. Polymer formation takes place with loss of atoms (or) groups like NH3, H20 etc.
  3. It is step growth polymerisation.
  4. These are called condensed polymers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 21.
What is Ziegler – Natta catalyst? [T.S. Mar. 19]
Answer:
A mixture of Tri alkyl aluminium and titanium chloride is called Ziegler – Natta catalyst
E.g.: (C2H5)3 Al + TiCl4

Question 22.
How is Dacron obtained from ethylene glycol and terepthalic acid?
Answer:
Formation of dacron is an example of condensation polymerisation. It is obtained from ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid as follows.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 2

Question 23.
What are the repeating monomeric units of Nylon 6 and Nylon 6, 6?
Answer:
The repeating monomeric units of Nylon – 6 is Capro lactam
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 3
The repeating monomeric units of Nylon 6, 6 are hexamethylene diamine and Adipic acid.
H2N-(CH2)6 – NH2
Hexamethylene
HOOC – (CH2)4 – COOH
Adipic acid

Question 24.
What is the difference between Buna – N and Buna – S ?
Answer:
Buna – N : Buna – N is the copolymer which is formed by the polymerisation of 1, 3 – Butadiene and acrylonitrile.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 4

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 25.
Arrange the following polymers in increasing order of their molecular forces.

  1. Nylon 6, 6 Buna – S, Polythene
  2. Nylon 6, Neoprene, Polyvinyl chloride

Answer:

  1. Increasing order of inter molecular forces of given polymers is
    Buna – S < polythene < Nylon -6, 6
  2. Increasing order of inter molecular forces of given polymers is
    Neoprene < polyvinyl chloride < Nylon – 6.

Question 26.
Identify the monomer in the following polymeric structures
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 5
Answer:

  1. Monomers present in Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 6 are decane dioic acid HOOC -CH2-)8 COOH and hexamethylene diamine H2N – (CH2-)6 NH2
  2. Monomers present in (-NH – CO – NH – CH2 -)n are urea CO (NH2)2, formaldehyde HCHO.

Question 27.
Name the different types of molecular masses of polymers.
Answer:
The different types of important molecular masses of polymers are

  1. Number average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathbf{M}}_{\mathrm{n}}\))
  2. Weight average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathbf{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}\))

Question 28.
What is PDI (Poly Dispersity Index) ? [A.P. Mar. 19]
Answer:
Poly Dispersity Index (PDI) : The ratio between weight average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathbf{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}\)) and the number average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathbf{M}}_{\mathrm{n}}\)) of a polymer is called Poly Dispersity Index (PDI).

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 29.
What is vulcanization of rubber ? [T.S. Mar. 19, 16; A.P. Mar. 17]
Answer:
Vulcanization of rubber : The process of heating the raw rubber with sulphur (or) with sulphur compounds to improve it’s physical properties is called vulcanization of rubber.

Question 30.
What is the cross linking agent used in the manufacture of type rubber ?
Answer:
In the manufacture of tyre rubber 5% sulphur is used as cross linking agent. ‘

Question 31.
What is biodegradable polymer ? Give one example of a biodegradable polyester ?
Answer:
Biodegradable poiymers : The polymers degradable by enzymatic hydrolysis and to some extent by oxidation are called biodegradable polymers.
E.g. : Nylon – 2, Nylon – 6, PHBV, Polyglycolic acid, Polylactic acid etc.

Question 32.
What is PHBV ? How is it useful to man ? [A.P. Mar. 19, 18, 16; T.S. Mar. 18, 16, 15]
Answer:
Poly β – hydroxy butyrate – CO – β – hydroxy Valerate (PHBV) : It is a Copolymer of 3 -hydroxy butanoic acid and 3 – hydroxy pentanoic acid.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 7
Properties & Uses : The properties of PHBV vary according to the ratio of both the acids, 3-hydroxy butanoic acid provides stiffness and 3-hydroxy pentanoic acid imparts flexibility to copolymer.
It is used in medicine for making capsules.
PHBV also undergoes degradation by bacteria.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 33.
Give the structure of nylon 2 – nylon 6 ?
Answer:
Nylon 2 – Nylon 6 :
an alternating polyamide copolymer of glycine (Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 8 – COOH) and amino caproic acid (H2N – CH2)5 – COOH). It is a biodegradable polymer.
Structure of Nylon 2 – Nylon – 6
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 9

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Classify the following into addition and condensation polymers [A.P. Mar. 16]
i) Terylene
ii) Bakelite
iii) Polyvinyl chloride
iv) Polythene
Answer:
i) Terylene is a condensation polymer.
ii) Bakelite is a condensation polymer
iii) Polyvinyl chloride is an addition polymer
iv) Polythene is an addition polymer.

Question 2.
How do you explain the functionality of a polymer ?
Answer:
The number of bonding sites present in the monomers of the polymer is called functionality.
E.g.:

  1. Functionality of ethene, propene is one.
  2. Functionality of ethylene glycol is two.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 3.
Distinguish between the terms homo polymer and co polymer. Give one example of each.
Answer:
Homopolymers : The polymers which are formed by the polymerisation of a single monomeric species are known as homopolymers.
E.g. : Polyethene; Poly styrene.
Copolymers: A polymer which is formed by the polymerisation of two (or) more chemically different types of monomer units is called copolymer.
E.g.: Butadiene – Styrene polymer (Buna-S)

Question 4.
Define thermoplastics and thermosetting polymers with two examples of each.
Answer:
Thermoplastic Polymers : These are the linear (or) slightly branched long chain molecules capable of softening on heating and hardening on cooling. E.g. : Polystyrene, polythene.
Thermo setting polymers: These polymers are cross linked (or) heavily branched molecules which on heating undergo extensive cross linking in moulds and again become infusible.
Eg.: Bakelite, urea-formaldehyd, resin etc….

Question 5.
Explain copolymerization with an example.
Answer:
Copolymers: A polymer which is formed by the polymerisation of two (or) more chemically different types of monomer units is called copolymer.
E.g.: Butadiene-Styrene polymer(Buna-S)
The process of formation of copolymer is called copolymerisation.
E.g. : Buna – S : Buna – S is the copolymer which is formed by the polymerisation of 1,3- Butadiene and Styrene.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 10

Question 6.
Explain free radical mechanism for the polymerization of ethene.
Answer:
Polymerisation of ethene to polythene proceeds through free radical mechanism. The initiator used in this reaction is benzoyl peroxide. This mechanism involves three steps.
1) Chain initiation : The addition of phenyl free radical formed by the peroxide to the ethene double bond and forms a larger free radical.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 11
C6H5 + CH2 = CH2 → C6H5 – CH2 – CH2

2) Chain propagation : The above formed radical reacts with another molecule of ethene another bigger sized radical is formed. The repetetion of this sequence takes places.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 12
3) Chain Termination : The product radical formed reacts with another radical to form polymerised product.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 13

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 7.
Write the names and structures of the monomers used for getting the following polymers . [Mar. 14]
i) Polyvinyl chloride
ii) Teflon
iii) Bakelite
iv) Polystyrene.
Answer:
i) Polyvinyl chloride
Monomer : Vinyl chloride
Structure : CH2 = CH – Cl

ii) Teflon
Monomer : Tetrafluoro ethylene
Structure : CF2 = CF2

iii) Bakelite
Monomers : Phenol, Formal dehyde
Structure : Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 14

iv) Polystyrene
Monomer : Styrene
Structure : Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 15

Question 8.
Write the names and structures of the monomers of the following polymers.
i) Buna – S
ii) Buna – N
iii) Dacron
iv) Neoprene
Answer:
i) Buna – S
Monomers : 1,3- Butadiene, Styrene
Structure :
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 16

ii) Buna – N
Monomers : 1,3- Butadiene, Acrylonitrile
Structure : CH2 = CH – CH = CH2, CH2 = CH – CN

iii) Dacron
Monomers : Ethylene glycol, Terephthalic acid
Structure : HOCH2 – CH2OH, C HOOC Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 17 COOH

iv) Neoprene
Monomers : 2 – chloro -1,3- Butadiene
Structure :
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 18

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 9.
What is natural rubber ? How does it exhibit elastic properties ?
Answer:

  1. Natural rubber is a polymer and possesses elastic properties.
  2. It is an elastomer and it is manufactured from rubber latex. Latex is a colloidal dispersion of rubber in water.
  3. Natural rubber may be considered as a linear polymer of isoprene. It is also called as cis-1, 4-Poly isoprene.
  4. The cis poly isoprene molecule consists of various chains held together by weak vander waals interactions and has a colloid structure. Thus it stretches like a spring and exhibits elastic properties.

Question 10.
Explain the purpose of vulcanization of rubber. [T.S. Mar. 17]
Answer:

  1. Natural rubber becomes soft at high temperatures and brittle at low temperatures. It shows high water absorption capacity.
  2. Natural rubber is soluble in non-polar solvents and is non-resistant to oxidising agents.
  3. To improve these physical properties rubber can be vulcanised.
  4. The process of heating the raw rubber with sulphur (or) with sulphur compounds to improve it’s physical properties is called vulcanisation of rubber.
  5. The vulcanized rubber has improved properties like elasticity, minimum water absorbing tendency, high resistance to chemical oxidation as well as organic solvents.

Question 11.
Explain the difference between natural rubber and synthetic rubber.
Answer:
Natural rubber : The rubber which is obtained from natural sources such as plants and animals rubber called natural rubber. E.g.: Starch, cellulose, rubber etc.

Synthetic rubber : The rubber which are artificially prepared i.e. man-made are called synthetic rubbers.
These have wide applications in daily life as well as in industry.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 12.
How does the presence of double bonds in rubber molecules influence their structure and reactivity ?
Answer:

  1. Natural rubber is cis. poly isoprene. It is obtained by polymerisation of isoprene. The polymerisation takes place at 1, 4 positions. .
  2. In rubber molecule double bonds are located between C2 and C3 of the monomer
    isoprene.
  3. These double bonds (cis) do not allow the polymer chain to come closer. Therefore only weak vander waal’s forces are present.
  4. The chains are not linear, they can be stretched just like springs and exhibits elastic properties.

Question 13.
What are LDP and HDP ? How are they formed ?
Answer:
Polythenes are two types : .

  1. LDP (Low Density Polythene),
  2. HDP (High Density Polythene)

1) Low Density Polythene : LDP is formed by the polymerisation of ethene under high pressure of 1000 to 2000 atm. at a pressure of 350 to 570K in the presence of traces of dioxygen (or) a peroxide initiator.
Properties :
a) This is obtained through the free radical addition.
b) LDP is chemically inert and tough.
c) LDP is flexible and a poor conductor of electricity.
Uses:
a) It is used in the insulation of electric cables.
b) It is used in the manufacture of pipes in agriculture irrigation.

2) High Density Polythene : HDP is formed by the polymerisation of ethene in a hydro carbon solvent in presence of Ziegler Natta catalyst at a temperature of’333K to 343 K and under a pressure of 6 – 7 atm
Properties :
a) HDP consists of linear molecules and has high density due to close packing.
b) It is chemically inert and more tough, hard.
Uses:
a) It is used in manufacture of house hold articles like buckets, dustbins etc.
b) It is used in manufacture of pipes.

Question 14.
What are natural and synthetic polymers ? Give two examples of each type.
Answer:
Natural polymers : The polymers which are obtained from natural sources such as plants and animals are called natural polymers.
E.g.: Starch, cellulose, rubber etc.

Synthetic polymers: The polymers which are artificially prepared i.e. man-made are called synthetic polymers.
These have wide applications in daily life as well as in industry.
E.g.: Plastics, Nylon 6, 6, synthetic rubbers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 15.
Write notes on different types molecular masses of polymers.
Answer:
The molecular mass of the polymer doesnot remain constant as in the case of simple chemical substances. So the molecular weight of a polymer is expressed in terms Of “average value”.
The average molecular masses of polymers expressed in different ways. The following are the important among them.

  1. Number average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{n}}\)),
  2. Weight average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}\))

i) Number average molecular mass (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{n}}\)) : If a polymer sample contains N1 particles of mass M1 each and N2 particles of Mass M2 each and so on.
The number average molecular weight (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{n}}\)) of the polymer = \(\frac{\sum_{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{i}}=1}^{\infty} \mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{i}} \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{i}}}{\sum_{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{i}}=1}^{\infty} \mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{i}}}\)
(\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{n}}\)) can be determined by end group analysis method (or) physical methods based on the number of particle present.

ii) Weight average molecular weight (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}\)) : Weight average molecular weight (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}\)) is calculated by multiplying the molecular weight of each type of particle with contribution of the species to the total weight of the sample.
Weight average molecular weight (\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{w}}\)) of the polymer = \(\frac{\sum_{n_{i}=1}^{\infty} N_{i} M_{i}^{2}}{\sum_{n_{i}=1}^{\infty} N_{i} M_{i}}\)

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Write an essay on i) Addition polymerization and ii) Condensation polynerization
Answer:
i) Addition Polymerization : Addition polymerization involves the self addition of unsaturated monomers without loss of any small molecules to form polymer.
The polymer so formed is called addition polymer.
This polymerisation is also called chain growth polymerisation.
In addition polymerisation, monomers should contain double bonds.
This type of polymerisation can be broadly subdivided into 2 groups.
a) ionic polymerisation (cationic & anionic)
b) free radical polymerization
Addition polymerization mechanism involves three steps. They are : i)-Chain initiation step ii) Chain propagation step and iii) Chain termination step.
E.g. : Vinyl Chloride molecules polymerises to PVC.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 19

ii) Condensation polymerization : In this polymerisation monomers combine together with the loss of simple molecules like H2O, NH3 etc. The formed polymer is called condensation polymer.
Condensation polymers are generally derived from di (or) polyfunctional monomers. This polymerization is also called step polymerization.
E.g.: i) Nylon – 6,6 is formed from hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid by condensation.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 20
ii) Polyethylene terephthalate (PET) from ethylene glycol and terephtholic acid by condensation reaction.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 21

Question 2.
Explain the classification of polymers based on their source and structure.
Answer:
On the basis of source polymers are classified into three types.

  1. Natural polymers
  2. Semi synthetic polymers
  3. Synthetic polymers

1) Natural polymers : The polymers which are obtained from natural sources such as plants and animals are called natural polymers.
E.g.: Starch, cellulose, rubber etc.

2) Semi synthetic polymers : The polymers which are synthetic derivatives of the natural polymers are called semisynthetic polymers.
E.g. : Cellulose rayon, cellulose nitrate.

3) Synthetic polymers : The polymers which are artificially prepared i.e. man-made are called synthetic polymers. .
These have wide applications in daily life as well as in’ industry.
E.g.: Plastics, Nylon 6, 6, synthetic rubbers.

Classification of polymers on the basis of structure :
i) Linear polymers : It is one in which the repeating units are similar to the links in a very long chain.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 22
E.g.: Polythene, PVC etc.

ii) Branched chain polymers : It is one in which some of the molecules are attached as side chains to the linear chains.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 23
E.g.: Low density polythene (LDPE) etc.

iii) Cross linked (or) network polymers : More branching at random points connecting many chains give rise to network (or) cross linked polymers.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 24
E.g.: Bakelite, melamine etc.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 3.
Explain the classification of polymers based on the mode of polymerization and nature of molecular forces.
Answer:
On the basis of mode of polymerisation polymers are classified into two types :
1) Addition polymers
2) Condensation polymers.
1) Addition Polymer : The polymer which is formed by the addition of molecules of monomers of same type (or) different type containing double bonds is called addition polymer.
Eg.: Polyethene, poly acrylonitrile.
2) Condensation polymer : The polymer which is formed by the condensation reaction between molecules having more than one functional group is called condensation polymer.
Eg.: Nylon 6, 6, Poly Ethylene terephthalate.

On the basis of molecular forces polymers are classified into four types.

  1. Elastomers : These are rubber like solids with elastic properties.
    Eg.: Buna-S, Buna-N.
  2. Fibres : Fibres are the thread forming solids which possess high tensile strength.
    Eg.: Nylon 6, 6, polyesters.
  3. Thermoplastic Polymers : These are the linear (or) slightly branched long chain molecules capable of softening on heating and hardening on cooling.
    Eg.: Polystyrene, polythene.
  4. Thermo setting polymers : These polymers are cross linked (or) heavily branched molecules which on heating undergo extensive cross linking in moulds and again become infusible.
    Eg.: Bakelite, urea-formaldehyde resin etc….

Question 4.
What are synthetic rubbers ? Explain the preparation and uses of the following
i) Neoprene
ii) Buna-N
iii) Buna-S.
Answer:
The polymer which is capable of getting stretched almost to double the length and which is also vulcanizable as in the case of natural rubber is called a synthetic rubber.
1) These are homo polymers of 1, 3 – butadiene derivatives (or) copolymers in which one of the monomer is 1, 3 – Butadiene (or) its derivatives and the other is any unsaturated monomer.
2) Synthetic rubber return to its original shape and size when the stretched force is removed.
Eg.: Neoprene, Buna – S, Buna – N.

i) Neoprene : Neoprene is formed by the free radical polymerisation of chloroprene (2-Chloro 1, 3 – Butadiene)
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 25
Uses:
1) It has superior resistance to vegetable and animal oils.
2) It is used in the manufacture of gaskets, conveyor belts.

ii) Buna – N : Buna – N is the copolymer which is formed by the polymerisation of 1, 3 – Butadiene and acrylonitrile.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 26
Uses:
1) It is resistant to the action of petrol, lubricating oil and organic solvents.
2) It is used in. making oil seals, tank lining.

iii) Buna – S : Buna – S is the copolymer which is formed by the polymerisation of 1, 3 – Butadiene and Styrene.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 27
Uses :
1) It is a good substitute for natural rubber.
2) It is used in manufacture of auto tyres.
3) It is used in manufacture of floor tiles.
4) It is used in manufacture of foot wear components, cable insultation

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Is [-CH2 – CH (C6H5-)] n a homopolymer or a copolymer ?
Solution:
It is a homopolymer and the monomer from which it is obtained is styrene C6H5CH = CH2.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 2.
A polymer contains 10 molecules with molecular mass 10,000 and 10 molecules with molecular mass 1,00,000. Calculate number – average molecular mass.
Solution:
\(\overline{\mathrm{M}}_{\mathrm{n}}=\frac{\sum \mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{i}} \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{i}}}{\sum \mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{i}}}=\frac{10 \times 10000+10 \times 100000}{10+10}\) = 55,000

Intext Questions

Question 1.
What are polymers ?
Answer:
Polymers are high molecular mass substances consisting of large -number of repeating structural units. They are also called as macromolecules. Some examples of polymers are polythene, bakelite, rubber, nylon 6, 6 etc.

Question 2.
How are polymers classified on the basis of structure ?
Answer:
On the basis of structure, the polymers are classified as below :

  1. Linear polymers such as polythene, polyvinyl chloride, etc.
  2. Branched chain polymers such as low density polythene.
  3. Cross linked polymers such as bakelite, melamine, etc.

Question 3.
Write the names of monomers of the following polymers.
Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers 28
Answer:

  1. Hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid
  2. Caprolactam
  3. Tetrafluoroethene.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Polymers

Question 4.
Classify the following as addition and condensation polymers : Terylene, Bakelite, Polyvinyl chloride, polythene.
Answer:
Additon polymers : Polyvinyl chloride, polythene. Condensation polymers : Terylene, Bakelite.

Question 5.
Explain the difference between Buna – N and Buna – S. .
Answer:
Buna – N is a copolymer of 1, 3 – butadiene and acrylonitrile and Buna-S a copolymer of 1, 3—butadiene and styrene.

Question 6.
Arrange the following polymers in increasing order of their intermolecular forces.
i) Nylon 6, 6 Buna — S, Polythene. ii) Nylon 6, Neoprene, Polyvinyl chloride.
Answer:
In order of increasing intermolecular forces.

  1. Buna—S, Polythene, Nylon 6, 6.
  2. Neoprene, Polyvinyl chloride, Nylon 6.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 7th Lesson d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 7th Lesson d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What are transition elements? Give examples.
Answer:
Transition elements are the elements that contain partially filled d-subshells in their ionic state (or) in their elementary state.
Eg : Mn, Co, Ag etc.

Question 2.
Which elements of 3d, 4d, and 5d series are not regarded as transition elements and why?
Answer:
Zn (3d-series), Cd (4d-series), Hg (5d-series) are not regarded as transition elements because these contains completely filled d-subshells.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 3.
Why are d-block elements called transition elements ?
Answer:
The name transition elements given to d-block is due to their properties which are transitioned between the electropositive s-block metals and electronegative p-block elements.

Question 4.
Write the general electronic configuration of transition elements.
Answer:
General electronic configuration of transition elements is (n – 1)d1-10 ns1-2.

Question 5.
In what way is the electronic configuration of transition elements different from non . transition elements ?
Answer:

  • The general electronic configuration of transition elements is (n – 1) d1-10 ns1-2.
  • The general electronic configuration of non-transition elements is (n – 1)d1-10 ns2.

Question 6.
Write the electronic configuration of chromium (Cr) and copper (Cu).
Answer:

  • Electronic configuration of chromium (Cr) – [Ar]4s1d5.
  • Electronic configuration of copper (Cu) – [Ar]4s13d10.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 7.
Why do transition elements exhibits characteristic properties ?
Answer:
Due to the presence of partially filled d-orbitals transition elements exhibit characteristic properties such as variable oxidation states, colour property, magnetic property, complex tendency etc.

Question 8.
Scandium is a transition element. But Zinc is not. Why
Answer:
Scandium has electronic configuration [Ar] 4s23d1.
Zinc has electronic configuration [Ar] 4s23d10.
Scandium has one unpaired d-electron where as Zinc has zero unpaired d-electrons so Scandium is transition element but Zinc is not.

Question 9.
Even though silver has d10 configuration, it is regarded as transition element. Why ?
Answer:
The outer electronic configuration of silver is – 4d105s1. It is having general electronic configuration of a transition element (n – 1) d1-10 ns1-2.
So silver is a transition element.

Question 10.
Write the electronic configuration of Co2+ and Mn2+.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of Co+2 is [Ar] 4s0 3d7.
  • The electronic configuration of Mn+2 is [Ar] 4s0 3d5.

Question 11.
Why are Mn2+ compounds more stable than Fe2+ towards oxidation to their +3 state ?
Answer:

  • Mn+2 has electronic configuration [Ar] 4s0 3d5.
  • Fe+2 has electronic configuration [Ar] 4s1 3d6.
  • Mn+2 has half filled d-subshell which is more stable.
  • Hence Mn+2 compounds are more stable than Fe+2 toward oxidation to their +3 state.

Question 12.
Which metal in the first series of transition metals exhibits +1 oxidation state most frequently and why ?
Answer:
Copper exhibits +1 oxidation state most frequently because Cu+ has electronic configuration [Ar] 4s03d10 which has a fulfilled d-subshell which is more stable.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 13.
Why do transition elements exhibit more than one oxidation state (variable oxidation states) ?
Answer:
Transition elements exhibits more than one oxidation state.

Reason:
The energy difference between (n -1) d subshell and ns subshell is very low. So both of these subshells compelete to lose the electrons.

Question 14.
Though Sc is a transition element, it does not exhibit variable oxidation state. Why ?
Answer:
Scandium has electronic configuration [Ar] 4s23d1. It has only one unpaired d-electron. So it does not exhibits variable oxidation state. It exhibits +3 stable oxidation state.

Question 15.
Why is it difficult to obtain M3+ oxidation state in Ni, Cu and Zn ?
Answer:

  • Ni has electronic configuration [Ar] 4s23d8.
  • Ni+2 has electronic configuration [Ar] 4s03d8
  • It is difficult to remove an electron from 3d8. So, Ni+3 is difficult to obtain. (Ni has high negative enthalpy of hydration).
  • Cu has electronic configuration [Ar] 4s13d10.
  • Cu+ has electronic configuration [Ar] 3d10
  • It is difficult to remove the electrons from 3d10 (stable). So, Cu+3 is difficult to obtain.
  • Zn has electronic configuration [Ar] 4s23d10
  • Zn+2 has electronic configuration [Ar] 4s03d10
  • It is difficult to remove the electron from 3d10 (stable). So Zn+3 is difficult to obtain.

Question 16.
Why is Cr2+ reducing and Mn3+ oxidizing even though both have the same d4 electronic configuration.
Answer:
Cr+2 is reducing as its configuration changes from d4 to d3, the latter having a half filled t2g level. On the other hand the change from Mn+2 to Mn+3 results in the half filled (d5) configuration which has extra stability.

Question 17.
Although Cr, Mo and W belong to the same group (group 6) Cr (VI) is a strong oxidizing agent while Mo (VI) and W (VI) are not. Why ?
Answer:
In group 6, Mo (VI) and W (VI) are more stable than Cr (VI). Thus Cr (VI) in the form of dichromate in acidic medium is a strong oxidising agent. Where as MoO3 and WO3 are not.

Question 18.
What do you infer from the fact that M3+/M2+ standard electrode potential of Mn is comparatively higher and that of Fe is comparitively lower ?
Answer:
M3+/M2+ standard electrode potential of Mn is comparatively higher than that of Fe is comparatively lower. This is because much larger 3rd ionisation energy of Mn (d5 to d4).

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 19.
Transition elements have high melting points. Why ?
Answer:
Transition elements have high melting points because of involvement of greater number of electrons from (n – 1)d in addition to ns electrons in the interatomic metallic bonding of these metals.

Question 20.
Among the first transition series (3d series) Chromium has highest melting point. Why? Ans. Among first transition series (3d-series) chromium has highest melting point.
Reason : In chromium one unpaired electron per d-orbital is particularly favourable for strong inter atomic interactions.

Question 21.
Compared to s-block elements, the transition elements exhibit higher enthalpy of atomization. Why ?
Answer:
Because of large no. of unpaired electrons in their atoms transition elements have stronger inter atomic interaction and hence stronger bonding between atoms resulting in higher enthalpies of atomisation.

Question 22.
Among the first transition series (3d series) zinc has lowest enthalpy of atomization. Why ?
Answer:
Among the first transition series zinc has lowest enthalpy of atomisation because zinc has no unpaired electrons in their atomic state or in ionic state.

Question 23.
How do you expect the density of transition elements to vary in a given series and why ?
Answer:
In a given series the density of transition elements increases.

Eg. : From Titanium to copper there is a significant increase in the density.
This is due to decrease in metallic radius coupled with increase in atomic mass.

Question 24.
How do the atomic and ionic sizes vary among transition metals in a given series ?
Answer:
In a given series of transition elements atomic and ionic sizes progressively decreased. This is due to entering of a new electron into d-orbital each time.

Question 25.
Why do Mn, Ni and Zn exhibit more negative E values than expected ?
Answer:
E0 values of Mn, Ni and Zn are more negative than expected from general trend. This is due to the stabilities of half filled d-subshell (d5) in Mn+2 and completely filled d-subshell (d10) in Zinc. For Nickel E0 value is related to the highest negative enthalpy of hydration.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 26.
Among the first transition series (3d series) only copper has positive EM2+/M value. Why?
Answer:
Among the first transition series only copper has positive EM2+/M value. This is due to high ∆aH0 and low ∆hydH0 values.

Question 27.
Cu+2 forms halides like CuF2, CuCl2 and CuBr2 but not CuI2. Why ?
Answer:
Cu+2 forms halides like CuF2, CuCl2 and CuBr2 but not CuI2 because Cu+2oxidises I to I2
2Cu+2 + 4I → Cu2I2 + I2

Question 28.
The highest Mn fluoride is MnF4 where as the highest oxide is Mn2O7 Why ?
Answer:
The ability of oxygen to stabilize the high oxidation states exceeds that of fluoride. Thus the highest Mn fluoride is MnF4 where as highest oxide is Mn2O7.

Question 29.
In its fluoride or Oxide, in which a transition metal exhibits highest oxidation state and why ?
Answer:

  • In fluorides highest oxidation numbers are achieved in TiF4, VF5 and CrF6.
  • The +7 state of Mn is represented in MnO3F.
  • The highest oxidation number in oxides acheived from Sc2O3 to Mn2O7.
  • In Mn2O7, Mn oxidation state is +7.

Question 30.
Why Zn2+ is diamagnetic whereas Mn2+ is paramagnetic ? [T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:

  • Zn+2 electronic configuration is [Ar] 4s03d10. It has no unpaired electrons. So it is dia magnetic.
  • Mn+2 electronic configuration is [Ar] 4s03d5. It has five unpaired electrons so it is paramagnetic.

Question 31.
Write ‘spin only’ formula to calculate the magnetic moment of transition metal ions.
Answer:
Spin only formula to calculate the magnetic moment of transition metal ions is
μ = \(\sqrt{n(n+2)}\) BM
BM = Bohr Magneton.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 32.
Calculate the ‘spin only’ magnetic moment of Fe2+(aq) ion.
Answer:
Fe+2 ion has electronic configuration [Ar] 4s03d6
It has four unpaired electrons n = 4
Spin only magnetic moment μ = \(\sqrt{n(n+2)}\) BM = \(\sqrt{4(4+2)}\) = \(\sqrt{24}\) BM = 4.9 BM

Question 33.
What is meant by ‘disproportionation’ ? Give an example of disproportionation reaction in aqueous solution.
Answer:
The reactions in which only one element undergo both oxidation as well, as reduction are called disproportion reactions.

When a particular oxidation state becomes less stable relative to other oxidation states, one lower, one higher, it is said to undergo disproportionation.
Eg: Cu+ ion is not stable in aqueous solution because it undergo disproportionation in aqueous solution.
2Cu+(aq) → Cu+2(aq) + Cu(s)

Question 34.
Aqueous Cu2+ ions are blue in colour, where as Aqueous Zn2+ ions are colourless. Why ?
Answer:

  • Electronic configuration of Cu+2 ion is [Ar] 4s03d9. If contains one unpaired electron due to presence of this unpaired electron aq. Cu+2 ions are blue in colour.
  • Electronic configuration of Zn+2 ion is [Ar] 4s03d10. It contains no unpaired electrons, due to absence of unpaired electrons aq. Zn+2 ions are colourless.

Question 35.
What are complex compounds ? Give examples.
Answer:
Complex compounds: Transition metal atoms or ions form a large number of compounds in which anions or neutral groups are bound to metal atom or ion through co-ordinate covalent bonds. Such compounds are called co-ordination compounds (or) complex compounds.
Eg.: [Fe(CN)6]4-, [Co(NH3)6]3+.

Question 36.
Why do the transition metals form a large number of complex compounds ?
Answer:
Transition elements (metals) forms a large number of complex compounds this is due to

  1. Small size of these ions
  2. High effective nuclear charge,
  3. Possessing in completely filled d-orbitals.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 37.
How do transition metals exhibit catalytic activity ?
Answer:
Catalytic properties:

  • Transition metals and their compounds form important catalysts in industry and in biological systems.
  • The catalytic activity of transition metals depends on their ability to exist in different oxidation states of oxidation (or) to form co-ordination compounds.
    Eg : 1) V2O5 is used as catalyst in manufacturing of SO3 from SO2.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 1
    2) Fe is used as a catalyst in manufacturing of NH3.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 2

Question 38.
Give two reactions in which transition metals or their compounds acts as catalysts.
Answer:
1) V2O5 is used as catalyst in manufacturing of SO3 from SO2.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 1
2) Fe is used as a catalyst in manufacturing of NH3.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 2

Question 39.
What is an alloy ? Give example.
Answer:
Alloy : An intimate mixture having physical properties similar to that of the metal formed by a metal with other metals or metalloids or sometimes a non metal is called as an alloy.
Eg.: Invar – 64% Fe, 35% Ni, Mn 8cc in traces
Nichrome – 60% Ni, 25% Fe, 15% Cr.

Question 40.
Why do the transition metals readily form alloys ?
Answer:
Because of similar atomic or ionic radii and similar characterstic properties of transition elements alloys are readily formed by these elements.

Question 41.
How do the ionic character and acidic nature vary among the oxides of first transition series ?
Answer:

  • As the oxidation number of a metal increases ionic character decreases in case of transition elements. Eg : Mn2O7 is a covalent green oil.
  • In CrO3 and V2O5 the acidic character is predominant.
  • V2O5 is however amphoteric though mainly acidic V2O5 reacts with alkali as well as acids to give V04-3 and VO+4.
  • CrO is basic
  • Mn2O7gives HMnO4 and CrO3 gives H2CrO4 and H2Cr2O7.

Question 42.
What is the effect of increasing pH on a solution of potassium dichromate ?
Answer:
On increasing pH of K2Cr2O7 (orange) it changes into K2CrO4 (yellow)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 3

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 43.
Name the oxometal anions of the first series of transition metals in which the metal exhibits the oxidation state equal to its group number.
Answer:
V4-3 ion exhibits ‘+5’ oxidation state which is equal to the V group number
V4-3 + 4(-2) = -3, x = +5

Question 44.
Permanganate titrations are carried out in the presence of sulphuric acid but not in presence of hydrochloric acid. Why ?
Answer:
Per manganate titrations are carried out in the presence of sulphuric acid but not in presence of hydrochloric acid because hydrochloric acid is oxidised to chlorine.

Question 45.
What is lanthanoid contraction ? [T.S. Mar. 19]
Answer:
The slow decrease of atomic and ionic radii in lanthanides with increase in atomic number is called lanthanide contraction.

Question 46.
What are the different oxidation states exhibited by the lanthanoids ?
Answer:

  • Lanthanoids exhibits +2, +3 states majorly. Sometimes +2 and +4 states exhibited in solid compounds.
  • The common oxidation state of lanthanoids is +3.

Question 47.
What is mischmetall ? Give its composition and uses. [A.P. Mar. 19, 16]
Answer:

  • Mischmetall is an alloy which consists of a lanthanoid metal (~ 95%) and iron (~ 5%) and traces of S, C, Ca and Al.
  • It is used in Mg- based alloy to produce bullets, shell and lighter flint.

Question 48.
What is actinoid contraction ?
Answer:
The gradual decrease in the size of atoms or M+3 ions across, the actinoid series is called actinoid contraction.

Question 49.
What are co-ordination compounds ? Give two examples.
Answer:
Co-ordination compounds : Transition metal atoms or ions form a large number of compounds in which anions or neutral groups are bound to metal atom or ion through coordinate covalent bonds. Such compounds are called co-ordination compounds (or) complex compounds.
Eg.: [Fe(CN)6]4-, [Co(NH3)6]+3.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 50.
What is a coordination polyhedron ?
Answer:
The spatial arrangement of the ligands which are directly bonded to the central atom or ions defines the geometry about the central atom is called co-ordination polyhedron
Eg. : Octahedral, tetrahedral etc.

Question 51.
What is a double salt ? Give example.
Answer:
The salts which contains two cations and one anion are called double salts.
These dissociates into simple ions completely when dissolved in water.
Eg : KCl.MgCl2.6H3O -Camallite.

Question 52.
What is difference between a double salt and a complex compound ?
Answer:
Double salts dissociate into simple ions completely when dissolved in water while complex compounds dissociate to give complex ion and the counter ions.

Question 53.
What is a ligand ?
Answer:
Ligand : A co-ordinating entity which is bound to the central atom by donating electron pairs is called a ligand.
Eg.: Cl, NH3, CN etc.

Question 54.
Give one example each for ionic and neutral ligands.
Answer:
Examples for ionic ligands – CN, I, Cl
Examples for Neutral ligands – NH3, H2O

Question 55.
How many moles of AgCl is precipitated when 1 mole of CoCl3 is treated with AgNO3, solution ?
Answer:
3 moles of AgCl is precipitated by the reaction of 1 mole of CoCl3 with AgNO3 solution
3 AgNO3 + CoCl3 → CO(NO3)3 +3 AgCl ↓

Question 56.
What is a chelate ligand ? Give example.
Answer:
The ligands which can form two co-ordinate covalent bonds through two donar atoms are called bidentate ligands. These bidentate ligands are also called chelate ligands.
Eg.: C2O4-2, CO3;-2 etc.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 57.
What is an ambidentate ligand ? Give example. [A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
A unidentate ligand containing two possible donor atoms can co-ordinate through either of donor atoms. Such ligands are called ambidentate ligands.
Eg : NO2

Question 58.
CUSO4.5H2O is blue in colour where as anhydrous CuSO4 is colourless. Why ?
Answer:
CUSO4.5H2O is blue in colour whereas anhydrous CuSO4 is colourless because in the absence of ligand, crystal field splitting does not occurs.

Question 59.
FeSO4 solution mixed with (NH4)2SO4 solution in 1:1 molar ratio gives the test for Fe2+ ion but CuS04 mixed with aqueous ammonia in 1 : 4 molar ratio does not give the test of Cu2+ ion. why ?
Answer:

  • FeSO4 solution mixed with (NH4)2SO4 solution in 1 : 1 molar ratio gives the test for Fe2+ because of formation of double salt (FeSO4(NH4)2 SO4 6H2O Mohr’s salt).
  • CuSO4 mixed with aq.ammonia in 1 : 4 molar ratio does not give the test of Cu+2 ion because of formation of complex compound [Cu(NH3)4]SO4.

Question 60.
How many geometrical isomers are possible in the following coordination entities ?

  1. [Cr(C2O4)3]3-
  2. [CO(NH3)3Cl3]

Answer:

  1. [Cr(C2O4)3]3- : Two geometrical isomers are possible i) cis-isomer, ii) Trans-isomer.
  2. [CO(NH3)3Cl3] : Two geometrical isomers are possible i) cis-isomer, ii) Trans-isomer.

Question 61.
What is the coordination entity formed when excess of aqueous KCN is added to an aqueous solution copper sulphate ? Why ?
Answer:
When excess of aq. KCN is mixed with aq.CuSO4 a complex named potassium tetra cyano cuprate (II) is formal
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 4

Question 62.
[Cr(NH3)6]3+ is paramagnetic while [Ni(CN)4]2- is diamagnetic Why ?
Answer:
[Cr(NH3)6]3+ is paramagnetic due to the presence of three unpaired electrons.
[Ni(CN)4]2- is diamagnetic due to the absence of unpaired electrons.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 63.
A solution of [Ni(H2O)6]2+ is green but a solution of [Ni(CN)4]2- is colourless. Why ?
Answer:

  • In the complex [Ni(H2O)6]2+, H2O molecules are weak ligands they do not cause pairing.
    So the complex has two unpaired electrons, d-d-transitions takes place due to absorption of red light radiation and emission of green colour occurs.
  • In the complex [Ni(CN)4]2-, CN ions are strong ligands they cause pairing. So there is no unpaired electrons so, no d-d transition. Hence it is colourless.

Question 64.
[Fe(CN)4]2- and [Fe(H2O)6]2+ are of different colours in dilute solutions. Why ?
Answer:
In the given complexes Fe has + 2 oxidation state with 3d6 outer electronic configuration. It has four unpaired electrons in presence of weak ligand H2O. But in presence of strong ligand CN the electrons are paired up. Due to the difference in the no. of unpaired electrons both complex have different colours in dilute solutions.

Question 65.
What is the oxidation state of cobalt in (i) K[Co(CO)4] and (ii) [Co(NH3)6]3+ ?
Answer:

  1. K[CO(CO)4] : 1 + x + 4(0) = 0, x = -1 .
  2. [CO(NH3)6]3+ : x + 6(0) = + 3, x = + 3

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Compared to 3d series the corresponding transition metals of 4d and 5d transition series show high enthalpy of atomization. Explain.
Answer:
Compared to 3d-series the corresponding transition metals of 4d and 5d transition series show high enthalpy of atomisation.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 5
Reason : This is due to the occurrence of much more frequent metal-metal bonding in compounds of heavy transition metals.

Question 2.
Compared to the changes in atomic and ionic sizes of elements of 3d and 4d series, the change in radii of elements of 4d and 5d series is virtually the same Comment.
Answer:
Compared to the change in atomic and ionic sizes of elements 3d and 4d series, the change in radii of elements 4d and 5d series is virtually the same.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 6
This is due to the intervention of the 4f orbitals which must be filled before the 5d series of elements begin. The filling of 4f before 5d orbitals results in a regular decrease in atomic radii called lanthanoid contraction. The consequence of lanthanoid contraction is that the 4d and 5d series exhibit same size of radii.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 3.
Account for the zero oxidation state of Ni and Fe in [Ni(CO)4] and [Fe(CO)5] respectively.
Answer:
In [Ni(CO)4] and [Fe(CO)5] the oxidation state of Ni and Fe is zero.
These low oxidation states found when the complex compound has ligands capable of π-acceptor character in addition to the σ-bonding.

Question 4.
Why do the transition metal ions exhibit characteristic colours in aqueous solution. Explain giving examples.
Answer:
Colour property of transition metal ions in aqueous solution is due to the presence of unpaired d-electrons. These unpaired d-electrons from a lower energy level of a metal ion in a complex is excited to a higher energy d-orbital of the same n value. The energy of excitation corresponds to the frequency of light absorbed and this frequency lies in visible region. The colour observed corresponds to the complementary colour of light obsorbed. The frequency of light absorbed is determined by the nature of the ligand. In aqueous solutions water molecules are ligands the colour of the ions observed are listed in the following table.
Colours of Some of the First Row (aquated) Transition Metal Ions
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 7

Question 5.
Explain the catalytic action of Iron(DI) in the reaction between I arid S2O82- ions.
Answer:
Transition metal ions can change their oxidation states and become more effective catalysts. Iron (III) Catalyses the reaction between iodide and per sulphate ions
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 8
Catalytic action explained as follows
2Fe+3 + 2I → 2Fe+2 + I2
2Fe+2 + S2O8-2 → 2Fe+3 + 2SO4-2

Question 6.
What are interstitial compounds ? How are they formed ? Give two examples.
Answer:
The compounds which are formed when small atoms like H, C or N are trapped inside the crystal lattices of metal are called interstitial compounds.
Eg : TiC, Fe3H, VH0.56 etc.

  • These are non stoichiometric and are neither typically ionic nor covalent.
  • They have high melting points, higher than of pure metals.
  • They are very hard, some borides approach diamond in hardness.
  • They retain metallic conductivity.
  • They are chemically inert.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 7.
Write the characteristics of interstitial compounds.
Answer:
Characteristics of interstitial compounds :

  • These are non stoichiometric and are neither typically ionic nor covalent.
  • They have high melting points, higher than of pure metals.
  • They are very hard, some borides approach diamond in hardness.
  • They retain metallic conductivity.
  • They are chemically inert.

Question 8.
Write the characteristic properties of transition elements. [A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Transition elements exhibits typical characteristic properties.

  • Electronic configurations.
  • Para and ferro magnetic properties.
  • Alloy forming ability
  • Complex forming ability.
  • Interstitial compounds.
  • Variable oxidation states.
  • Formation of coloured hydrated ions.
  • Catalytic property.
  • Metallic character.

Question 9.
Write down the electronic configuration of ‘

  1. Cr3+
  2. Cu+
  3. Co2+
  4. Mn2+

Answer:

  1. Cr3+ electronic configuration is [Ar] 4s03d3
  2. Cu+ electronic configuration is [Ar] 4s03d10
  3. Co2+ electronic configuration is [Ar] 4s03d7
  4. Mn2+ electronic configuration is [Ar] 4s03d5

Question 10.
What may be the stable oxidation state of the transition element with the following d electron configurations in the ground state of their atoms : 3d3 3d5 3d8 and 3d4 ?
Answer:

  1. 3d3-stable oxidation states are +2,+3,+4 and+5 (V)
  2. 3d5-stable oxidation states are +3, +4 and +6 (Cr)
  3. 3d5-stable oxidation states are +2, +4, +6 and +7 (Mn)
  4. 3d8-stable oxidation states are +2, +3 (Co)
  5. 3d4-This configuration does not exist.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 11.
What is lanthanoid contraction ? What are the consequences of lanthanoid contraction?
Answer:
Lanthanoid contraction : The overall decrease in atomic and ionic radii from lanthanum to leutetium is observed in the lanthanoids. This phenomenon is called lanthanoid contraction. It is due to the fact that with every additional proton in the nucleus, the corresponding electron goes into a 4f-subshell. This is too diffused to screen the nucleus as effectively as the more localised inner shell. Hence, the attraction of the nucleus for the outermost electrons increases steadily with the atomic number.

Consequences of Lanthanoid Contraction : The important consequences of lanthanoid contraction are as follows :
i) Basic character of oxides and hydroxides : Due to the lanthanoid contraction, the covalent nature of La-OH bond increases and thus, the basic character of oxides and hydroxides decreases from La(OH)3 to Lu(OH)3.
ii) Similarity in the size of elements of second and third transition series : Because of
lanthanoid contraction, elements which follow the third transition series are considerably smaller than would otherwise be expected. The normal size increases from Sc → Y → La and disappears after lanthanides. Thus, pairs of elements such as Zr/Hf, Nb/Ta and Mo/w are almost identical in size.
Due to almost similar size, such pairs have very sijnilar properties which makes their separation difficult.

iii) Separation of lathanoids : Due to lanthanoid contraction, there is a difference in some properties of lanthanoid like solubility, degree of hydration and complex formation. These difference enable the separation of lanthanoids by ion exchange method.

Question 12.
How is the variability in oxidation states of transition metals different from that of the non transition metals ? Illustrate with examples.
Answer:

  • In transition elements the oxidation states vary by unity (due to incomplete filling of d- orbitals)
    Eg : Mn exhibits +2, +3, +4, +5, +6 and +7 all differing by 1.
  • In non-transition element, this variation is selective, always differing by 2.
    Eg : S exhibits 2, 4, 6 oxidation states. N exhibits 3, 5 etc.

Question 13.
Describe the preparation of potassium dichromate from iron chromite ore.
Answer:
Preparation of K2Cr2O7 from chromite ore :
i) a) Potassium dichromate is obtained by the fusion of chromite ore (FeCr2O4) with sodium (or potassium) carbonate in the presence of excess of air.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 9
b) The solution is filtered and treated with sulphuric acid.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 10
c) Now sodium dichromate is treated with potassium chloride. As a result, potassium dichromate is produced.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 11

ii) Effect of increasing pH on K2Cr2O7 solution :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 12
On increasing pH, K2Cr2O7 changes into K2CrO4 (orange to yellow).

Question 14.
Describe the oxidising action of potassium dichromate and write the ionic equations for its.
With (i) iodide (ii) iron (II) solution (iii) H2S and (iv) Sn(II)
Answer:
Potassium dichromate is a strong oxidising agent. In acidic solution, its oxidising action may be represented as :
Cr2O72- + 14H+ + 6e → 2Cr3+ + 7H2O (E° = 1.33 V)
Ionic reactions :

  1. Reaction of K2Cr2O7 with I
    Cr2O72- + 14H+ + 6I → 2Cr3+ + 3I2 + 7H2O
  2. Reaction of K2Cr2O7 with Fe2+ (aq)
    Cr2O72- + 14H+ + 6Fe2+ → 2Cr3+ + 6Fe3+ + 7H2O
  3. Reaction of K2Cr2O7with H2S
    Cr2O72- + 8H+ + 3H2S → 2Cr+3 + 3S + 7H2O

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 15.
Describe the preparation of potassium permanganate.
Answer:
Preparation of KMnO4 Potassium permanganate is prepared by the fusion of MnO2 with an alkali metal hydroxide and an oxidising agent like KNO3. It forms dark green, K2MnO4 which disproportionates in a neutral or acidic solution to give permanganate.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 13

Question 16.
How does the acidified permanganate solution react with

  1. iron (II) ions
  2. SO2 and
  3. oxalic acid.

Write the ionic equations for the reactions.

Answer:
Reactions of KMnO4 in acidic medium
MnO4 + 8H+ + 5e → Mn2+ + 4H2O …………. (i)
1) Iron (II) ions : Ferrous is oxidised to ferric.
[Fe2+ → Fe3+ + e] × 5 ………………. (ii)
From equation (i) and (ii) 5Fe2+ + MnO4 + 8H+ → Mn2+ + 4H2O + 5Fe3+

2) SO2 : It is oxidised to SO42- by acidified KMnO4.
SO2 + 2H2O → SO42- + 4H+ + 2e ……………….(iii)
From equation (i) and (iii) .
5SO2 + 2MnO4 + 2H2O → 2Mn2+ + 4H+ + 5SO42-

3) Oxalic acid : C2O42- → 2CO2 + 2e ……………… (iv)
From equation (1) and (iv)
5C2O42- + 2MnO4 + 16H+ → 2Mn2+ + 8H2O + 10CO2

Question 17.
Predict which of the ions Cu+, Sc3+, Mn2+, Fe2+ are coloured in aqueous solution ? Give reasons.
Answer:
Only those ions will be coloured which have incomplete d-orbitals. Ions which has complete or vacant d-orbitals are colourless.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 14
As Sc3+ and Cu+ have 3d0 and 3d10 configuration in their valence shell so their aqueous solutions are colourless. All others, i.e., Ti3+, V3+, Mn2+ Fe+2 and Co2+ are coloured in aqueous medium.

Question 18.
Compare the stability of +2 oxidation state of the elements of the first transition series.
Answer:
Element (+2 state) 21Sc2+ Ti2+ 22 22V2+ 24Cr2+ 25Mn2+,
Electronic configuration 3d1 3d2 3d3 3d4 3d5
In all the elements listed, the removal of two 4s. Electrons (in Cr2+, i.e., from 4s and 1e from 3d), the 3d-orbitais get gradually occupied. Since, the number of empty d-orbitais decreases or the number unpaired electrons in 3d-orbitais increases with increase in atomic number of cations, so the stability of the cations (M2+) increases from Sc2+ to Mn2+.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 19.
Use Hund’s rule to derive the electronic configuration of Ce3+ ion and calculate its magnetic moment on the basis of ‘spin-only’ formula.
Answer:
Ce(Z = 58) = [Xe] = 4f1 5d1 6s2
Ce3+ = [Xe]4f1 (only one unpaired electron)
By ‘spin-only’ formula, Magentic moment of Ce3+(μ) = \(\sqrt{n(n+2)}\)
[∵ n = 1 (unpaired electron)] = \(\sqrt{1(1+2)}\) = \(\sqrt{3}\) = 1.73 BM

Question 20.
Write down the number of 3d electrons in each of the following ions : Ti2+, V2+ Cr3+ and Mn2+ Indicate how would you expect the five 3d orbitais to be occupied for these hydrated ions (octahedral).
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 15

Question 21.
Explain Werner’s theory of coordination compounds with suitable examples. [A.P. Mar. 18; T.S. Mar. 18, 15] [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Werner’s theory:
Postulates :
1) Every complex compound has a central metal atom (or) ion.

2) The central metal shows two types of valencies namely primary valency and secondary valency.

A) Primary valency: The primary valency is numerically equal to the oxidation state of the
metal. Species or groups bound by primary valencies undergo complete ionization. These valencies are identical with ionic bonds and are non-directional. These valencies are represented by discontinuous lines (…..)
Eg- : CoCl3 contains Co3+ and 3Cl ions. There are three Primary Valencies or three ionic bonds.

B) Secondary Valency : Each’ metal has a characteristic number of Secondary Valencies. They are directed in space around the central metal.
The number of Secondary Valencies is called Coordination numbe (C.N.) of the metal. These valencies are directional in Nature.
For example in CoCl3. 6NH3
Three Cl ions are held by primary Valencies and 6NH3 molecules are held by Secondary Valencies. In CuSO4 . 4NH3 complex SO42- ion is held by two Primary Valencies and 4NH3 molecules are held by Secondary Valencies.

3) Some negative ligands, depending upon the complex, may satisfy both primary and secondary valencies. Such ligands, in a complex, which satisfy both primary as well as secondary valencies do not ionize.

4) The primary valency of a metal is known as its outer sphere of attraction or ionizable valency while the Secondary valencies are known as the inner sphere of attraction or coordination Sphere. Groups bound by secondary valencies do not undergo ionization in the complex.

Example to Clarify Werner’s Theory
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 16
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 17

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 22.
Give the geometrical shapes of the following complex entities

  1. [Co(NH3)6]3+
  2. [Ni(CO)4]
  3. [Pt Cl4]2- and
  4.  [Fe(CN)8]4-.

Answer:

  1. Geometrical shape of [Co(NH3)6]3+ is octahedral
  2. Geometrical shape of [Ni(CO)4] is tetrahedral
  3. Geometrical shape of [Pt Cl4]2- is square planar
  4. Geometrical shape of [Fe(CN)8]4- is octahedral

Question 23.
Explain the terms
(i) Ligand
(ii) Coordination number
(iii) Coordination entity
(iv) Central metal atom/ion.
Answer:
i) Ligand : The ions or molecules bound to the central atom/ion in the coordination entity are called ligands. These may be
a) simple ions such as Cl
b) small molecules such as H2O or NH3
c) large molecules such as H2NCH2CH2NH2 or N(CH2CH2NH2)3 or even (d) macromolecules, such as proteins.
On the basis of the number of donor atoms available for coordination, the ligands can be classified as :
a) Unidentate : One donor atom, Eg.: AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 18
b) Bidentate : Two donor atoms, Eg. : H2NCH2CH2NH2
(ethane-1, 2-diamine or en), C2O42- (oxalate), etc.
c) Polydentate : More than two donor atoms, Eg. : N(CH2CH2NH2)3 EDTA, etc.

ii) Coordination number: The coordination number (CN) of metal ion in a complex can be defined as the number of ligands or donor atoms to which the metal is directly bonded.
Eg : In [PtCl6]2-, CN of Pt = 6, In [Ni(NH3/sub>)4]2+, CN of Ni 4.

iii) Coordination entity: A central metal atoms or ion bonded to a fixed number of molecules or ions (ligands) is known as coordination entity. For example [CoCl3(NH3)3. Ni(CO)4/sub>], etc.

iv) Central metal atom/ion : In a coordination entity, the atom/ion to which a fixed no. of ions/groups are bound in a definite geometrical arrangement around it is called central metal atom or ion. Eg: K4[Fe(CN)6] ‘Fe’ is central metal.

Question 24.
Explain the terms (i) Unidentate ligand (ii) bidentate ligand (iii) polydentate ligand and (iv) ambidentate ligand giving one example for each.
Answer:
i) Unidentate : The negative ion or neutral molecule having only one donor atom is called unidentate ligand
Eg : AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 19
ii) Bidentate (or didentate) : The ions or molecules having two donor atoms are called bidentate ligands.
Eg: AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 20
iii) Polydentate ligands : Ligands having more than one donor atom in the coordinating group and are capable of forming two or more coordinate bonds with same central atom simultaneously are called poly dentate ligands.
Eg : C2O4-2.
iv) Ambidentate: Ligand which can ligate through two different atoms is called ambidentate ligand. Eg: NO2, SCNions, NO2 ion can coordinate either through nitrogen or through oxygen to a central metal atom/ion. Similarly, SCN ion can coordinate through the sulphur or nitrogen atom.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 21

Question 25.
What is meant by chelate effect ? Give example.
Answer:
When a didentate or a polydentate ligand contains donor atoms positioned in such a way that when they coordinate with the central metal ion, a 5-or 6-membered ring is formed, the effect is known as chelate effect. Example
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 22

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 26.
Give the oxidation numbers of the central metal atoms in the following complex entities
(i) [Ni(CO)4]
(ii) [CO(NH3)6]3+
(iii) [Fe(CN)6]4- and
(iv) [Fe(C2O4)3]3-
Answer:
i) [Ni(CO)4] :
x + 4(0) = 0
x = 0
‘Ni’ oxidation state is zero.

ii) [CO(NH3)6]3+
x + 6(0) = + 3
x = +3
‘Co’ oxidation state is + 3.

iii) [Fe(CN)6]4-
x + 6(-1) = -4
x = + 2
‘Fe’ oxidation state is + 2.

iv) [Fe(C2O4)3]3-
x + 3(-2) = -3
x = + 3
‘Fe’ oxidation state is + 3.

Question 27.
Using IUPAC norms write the formulas for the following.

  1. Tetrahydroxozincate (II)
  2. Hexaamminecobalt (III) sulphate
  3. Potassium tetrachloropalladate (II) and
  4. Potassium tri(oxalato) chromate (III)

Answer:

  1. Tetrahydroxozincate (II) – [Zn(OH)4]-2
  2. Hexa ammine cobalt (III) sulphate – [Co(NH3)6]2 (SO4)3
  3. Potassium tetrachloropalladate – K2[PdCl4]
  4. Potassium tri(oxalato) chromate (III) – K3[Cr(C2O4)3]

Question 28.
Using IUPAC norms write the systematic names of the following. [A.P. Mar 19]

  1. [CO(NH3)6]Cl3
  2. [Pt(NH3)2Cl(NH2CH3)]Cl
  3. [Ti(H2O)6]3+ and
  4. [NiCl4]2-

Answer:

  1. Hexa ammine cobalt (III) chloride
  2. Diammine chlorido (methyl amine) platinum (II) chloride
  3. Hexa aquo titanium (III) ion
  4. Tetra chloro nickelate (III) ion

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 29.
Explain geometrical isomerism in Co-ordination compounds giving suitable examples. [A.P. Mar 19]
Answer:

  • Geometrical isomerism arises in Co-ordination complexes due to different possible geometric arrangements of the ligands.
  • This isomerism found in complexes with Co-ordination numbers 4 and 6.
  • In a square planar complex of formula [MX2L2] the two ligands may be arranged in adjacent to each other in a cis isomer (or) opposite to each other in a trans isomer.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 23
  • Square planar complex of type [MAB XL] shows three isomers two-cis and one trans. (A, B, X, L are unidentate ligands is square planar complex).
  • Geometrical isomerism is not possible in tetrahedral geometry.
  • In octahedral complexes of formula [MX2L4] in which two ligands X may be oriented cis or trans to each other.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 24
  • Another type of geometrical isomerism occurs in octahedral Co-ordination compounds of type [Ma3b3] if three donar atoms of the same ligands occupy adjacent positions at the corners of an octahedral face then it is facial (fac) isomer. When the positions occupied are around the meridian of the octahedran then it is meridonial (mer). isomer.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 25

Question 30.
What are homoleptic and heteroleptic complexes ? Give one example for each.
Answer:
Homoleptic complexes : These are the complexes in which a metal is bound by only ore kind of ligands.
eg.: [Co(NH3)6]3+
Heteroleptic complexes: These are the complexes in which a metal is bound by more than one kind of ligends. eg.: [Co(NH3)4Cl2]+

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain giving reasons :
(i) Transition metals and many of their compounds show paramagnetic behaviour.
(ii) The enthalpies of atomisation of the transition metals are high.
(iii) The transition metals generally form coloured compounds.
(iv) Transition metals and their many compounds act as good catalysts.
Answer:
i) Transition elements have unpaired electrons. Each unpaired electron has a magnetic moment associated with its spin angular momentum and orbital angular momentum. This is the reason of paramagnetism in transition metals.

ii) The reason for the high enthalpy of atomisation is the presence of large number of unpaired electrons in their atoms. These atoms have strong interatomic interaction and hence, stronger bonding between them.

iii) Formation of coloured compounds by transition metals is due to partial adsorption of visible light. The electron absorbs the radiation of a particular frequency (of visible region) and jumps into next orbital.

iv) Catalysts, at the solid surface, involve the formation of bonds between reactants molecules and atoms of the surface of the catalyst (I row transition metals utilise 3d and 48- electrons for bonding). This has the effect of increasing the concentration of the reactants at the catalyst surface and also lowering of the activation energy.
Transition metal ions show variable oxidation states, so they are effective catalysts.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 26

Question 2.
Describe the preparation of potassium permanganate. How does the acidified permanganate solution react with
(i) iron (II) ions
(ii) SO2 and
(iii) oxalic acid ?
Write the ionic equations.
Answer:
Preparation of KMnO4 Potassium permanganate is prepared by the fusion of MnO2 with an alkali metal hydroxide and an oxidising agent like KNO3. It forms dark green, K2MnO4 which disproportionates in a neutral or acidic solution to give permanganate.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 27
Reactions of KMnO4 in acidic medium
MnO4 + 8H+ + 5e → Mn2+ + 4H2O …………. (i)
i) Iron (II) ions : Ferrous is oxidised to ferric.
[Fe2+ → Fe3+ + e] × 5 ………………. (ii)
From equation (i) and (ii) 5Fe2+ + MnO4 + 8H+ → Mn2+ + 4H2O + 5Fe3+

ii) SO2 : It is oxidised to SO42- by acidified KMnO4.
SO2 + 2H2O → SO42- + 4H+ + 2e ……………….(iii)
From equation (i) and (iii) .
5SO2 + 2MnO4 + 2H2O → 2Mn2+ + 4H+ + 5SO42-

iii) Oxalic acid : C2O42- → 2CO2 + 2e ……………… (iv)
From equation (1) and (iv)
5C2O42- + 2MnO4 + 16H+ → 2Mn2+ + 8H2O + 10CO2

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 3.
Compare the chemistiy of actinoids with that of the lanthanoids with special reference to :
(i) electronic configuration (ii) oxidation state (iii) atomic and ionic sizes and (iv) chemical reactivity.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 28
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 29

Question 4.
How would you account for the following.
(i) Of the d4 species, Cr2+ is strongly reducing while manganese (HI) is strongly oxidising.
(ii) Cobalt (II) is stable in aqueous solution but in the presence of complexing reagents it is easily oxidised,
(iii) The d1 configuration is very unstable in ions.
Answer:
i) E° value of Cr3+/Cr2+ is negative (-0.41 V) while that of Mn3+/Mn2+ is positive (+1.57 V). This means that Cr2+ ions can lose electrons to form Cr3+ ions and act as a reducing agent while Mn3+ ions can accept electrons and can act as an oxidising agent.

ii) Cobalt (III) ion has greater tendency to form complexes than cobalt (II) ion. Therefore, Co (II) ion, being stable in aqueous solution, changes to Co (III) ion, in the presence of complexing reagents and gets oxidised.

iii) Ions of transition metals with d1 configuration tend to lose one electron to acquire d0 configuration that is quite stable. Therefore, such ions (with d1) undergo either oxidation or disproportionation hence unstable.

Question 5.
Give examples and suggest reasons for the following features of the transition medals.
(i) The lowest oxide of transition metal is basic, the highest is amphoteric/acidic.
(ii) A transition metal exhibits highest oxidation state in oxides and fluorides.
(iii) The highest oxidation state is exhibited in oxoanions of a metal.
Answer:
i) Acidic strength of oxides increases with the increase in oxidation state of the element Eg.: MnO(Mn2+) is basic whereas Mn2O7(Mn7+) is acidic in nature.

ii) Both oxygen and fluorine being highly electronegative can increase the oxidation state of a particular transition metal. In certain oxides, the element oxygen is involved in multiple bonding with the metal .and this is responsible for the higher oxidation state of the metal.

iii) This is also due to high electronegativity of oxygen eg.: chromium exhibits oxidation states of +6 in oxoanion [CrO4]2- and manganese shows oxidation state of +7 in oxoanion [MnO4]

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 6.
Compare the chemistry of the actinoids with that of lanthanoids with reference to : (i) electronic configuration (ii) oxidation states and (iii) chemical reactivity
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 30

Question 6.
Explain IUPAC nomenclature of Co-ordination compounds with suitable examples.
Answer:
IUPAC nomenclature : The formula of a compound is an abreviated description of the constitution of the compound. The fpllowing rules are prescribed by IUPAC for naming of Coordination compounds.
i) Positive ions are named first followed by negative ions,
eg.: Potassium hexacyanoferrate (II), K4[Fe(CN)6]

ii) Within the Co-ordination sphere ligands are named before the metal atom/ion. However, in formulae, metal ion is written first.
eg.: Tetraammine copper (II) sulphate [Cu(NH3)4]SO4

iii) Prefixes are used to denote the number of same ligands that the present in the Co¬ordination sphere. Complex ions are denoted in paranthesis ( ) and prefixed by bis, tris etc.
Examples:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 31
eg. : [CO(NH2CH2CH2NH2)Cl2] Cl is named as dichloro bis (ethylenediamine) cobalt (III) chloride.

iv) Ligands are named in alphabetical order.
eg.: [PtCl2(NH3)2 diammine dichloro platinum (II)

v) Anionic ligands are denoted by a suffix ‘O’ and neutral ligands are denoted by their original names.
eg.: Cl – Chloro, CN – Cyano
Exception for the above are indicated below.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 32
vi) Oxidation state of the metal ion is indicated by Roman numerical in parenthesis, eg.: [Ag(NH3)2] [Ag(CN)2] is named as diammine silver (I) dicyanoargentate (I).

vii) If the charge of the Co-ordination entity is negative, the name of the metal ends with a suffix-ate.
eg.: [CO(SCN)4]2- – tetrahiocyanato cobaltate (II)
Some metal ions are denoted by their names from which their symbols are derived
eg.: Fe – ferrate
Pb – plumbate
Sn – stannate .
Ag-argentate
Au-aurate

viii) Prefixes cis – and trans are used to designate adjacent and opposite geometric locations of the ligands, in a complex.
eg. :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 33
ix) Bridging ligands between two metal ions in a Co-ordination entity are denoted by prefix p(greek letter’mu).
eg.: [(NH3)4 CO(OH) (NH2)Co(NH3)4]+ is named as μ-amido-μ hydroxo bis (tetraammine) cobalt (IV) .

  1. Tetrahydroxozincate (II) – [Zn(OH4]-2
  2. Hexa ammine cobalt (III) sulphate – [Co(NH3)6]2 (SO4)3
  3. Potassium tetrachloropalladate – K2[PdCl4)
  4. Potassium tri(oxalato) chromate (III) – K3[Cr(C2O4)3]

Question 7.
Explain different types of isomerism exhibited by Co-ordination compounds, giving suitable examples.
Answer:
Isomerism in Co-ordination compounds : Isomers are compounds that have the same chemical formula but different arrangement of atoms. Two principal types of isomerism are known among Co-ordination compounds namely stereo isomerism and structural isomerism.
a) Stereoisomengni: Stereoisomerism is a form of isomerism in which two substances have the same composition and structure but differ in the relative spatial positions of the ligands. This can be sub divided into two classes namely.

  1. Geomethcal isomerism and
  2. optical isomerism

b) Structural isomerism:

  1. Linkage isomerism
  2. Co-ordination isomerism
  3. Ionisation isomerism
  4. Hydrate isomerism

a) (1) Geometrical isomerism:

  • Geometrical isomerism arises in Co-ordination complexes due to different possible geometric arrangements of the ligands.
  • This isomerism found in complexes with Co-ordination numbers 4 and 6.
  • In a square planar complex of formula [MX2L2] the two ligands may be arranged in adjacent to each other in a cis isomer (or) opposite to each other in a trans isomer.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 23
  • Square planar complex of type [MAB XL] shows three isomers two-cis and one trans. (A, B, X, L are unidentate ligands is square planar complex).
  • Geometrical isomerism is not possible in tetrahedral geometry.
  • In octahedral complexes of formula [MX2L4] in which two ligands X may be oriented cis or trans to each other.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 24
  • Another type of geometrical isomerism occurs in octahedral Co-ordination compounds of type [Ma3b3] if three donar atoms of the same ligands occupy adjacent positions at the corners of an octahedral face then it is facial (fac) isomer. When the positions occupied are around the meridian of the octahedran then it is meridonial (mer). isomer.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 25

a(2) Optical isomerism : Optical isomerism arises when two isomers of a compound exist such that one isomer is a mirror image of the other isomer. Such isomers are called optical isomers or enantiomers. The molecules or ions that cannot be superimposed are called chiral. The two forms are called dextro (d) and laevo (1) depending upon the direction they rotate the plane of polarised light in a polarimeter (d rotates to the right, l to the left). Optical isomerism is common in octahedral complexes involving bidentate ligands.

b(1) Linkage isomerism: Linkage isomerism arises in Co-ordination compound containing ambidentate ligand. A simple example is provided by complexes containing the thiocyanate ligand-NCS, which may bind through the nitrogen to give M-NCS or through sulphur to give M-SCN.
eg. : [Mn(CO)5SCN] and [Mn(CO)5NCS]

(2) Co-ordinate isomerism : This type isomerism arises from the interchange of ligands between cationic and anionic entities of different metal ions present in a complex.
eg. : [CO(NH3)6] [Cr(CN)6] and [Co(CN)6] [Cr(NH3)6]

(3) Ionisation isomerism: This form of isomerism arises when the counter ion in a complex salt is itself a potential ligand and can displace a ligand which can then become the counter ion
eg. : [CO(NH3)5SO4] Br and [Co(NH3)5Br]SO4

(4) Hydrate isomerism : This form of isomerism is known as ‘hydrate isomerism since water is involved as a solvent. Hydrate isomers differ by whether or not a hydrate molecule is directly bonded to the metal ion or merely present as free solvent molecules in the crystal lattice.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 8.
Discuss the nature of bonding and magnetic behaviour in the following Co-ordination entities on the basis of valence bond theory.
(i) [Fe(CN6)]4-
(ii) [FeF6]3-
(iii) [Co(C2O4)3]3- and
(iv) [CoF6]3-
Answer:
i) Fe(CN6)]4- : In this complex Fe is present as Fe2+.
Fe = [Ar] 3d64s2
Outer configuration of Fe2+ = 3d64s0
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 34
CN being strong field ligand, pair up the unpaired d electrons Thus, two 3d-orbital are now available for CN ions.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 35
Since, all the electrons are paired, the complex is diamagnetic. Moreover (n – 1) d- orbitals are involved in bonding, so, it is an inner orbital or low spin complex.

ii) [FeF6]3- : In this complex, the oxidation state of Fe is + 3.
Fe3+ = 3d54s0
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 36
F- is not a strong field ligand. It is a weak field ligand, so no pairing occurs. Thus, 3d- orbitals are not available to take part in bonding.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 37
Because of the presence of five unpaired electrons, the complex is paramagnetic. Moreover, nd-orbitals are involved in bonding, so it is an outer orbital or high spin complex.

iii) [Co(C2O4)3]3- : In this complex, the oxidation state of Co is + 3.
Outer configuration of Co = 3d7 4s2
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 38
Oxalate ion being a strong field ligand pair up the 3d electrons, thus two out of the five 3d-orbitals are available for oxalate ions.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 39
Since, all the electrons are paired, this complex is diamagnetic. It is an inner orbital complex because of the involvement of (n – 1) d-orbital for bonding.

iv) [CoF6]3- : In this complex, Co is present as Co3+.
Outer configuration of Co3+ = 3d6 4s0
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 40
Because of the presence of four unpaired electrons, the complex is paramagnetic. Since, nd orbitals take part in bonding, it is an outer orbital complex or high spin complex.

Question 9.
Sketch the spliting of d orbitals in an octahedral crystal field.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 41

Question 10.
What is spectrochemical series ? Explain the difference between a weak field ligand and a strong field ligand.
Answer:
The arrangement of ligands in order of their increasing field strengths, i.e., increasing crystal field splitting energy (CFSE) values is called spectrochemical series.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 42
The ligands with a small value of CFSE (∆0) are called weak field ligands. For such ligands ∆0 < P where P is the pairing energy. Whereas the ligands with a large value of CFSE are called strong field ligands. In case of such ligands ∆0 > P.

When ligands approach a transition metal ion, the d-orbitals split into two sets (t2g and eg), one with lower energy and the other with higher energy. The difference of energy between the two sets of orbitals is called crystal field splitting energy, ∆0 for octahedral field (and ∆t for tetrahedral field)

If ∆0 < P (pairing energy), the 4th electron enters one of the eg orbitals giving the configuration \(t_{2 g}^{3} e_{g}^{1}\) thereby forming high spin complex. Such ligands for which ∆0 < P are known as weak field ligands.

If ∆0 > P, the 4th electron pairs up in one of the t2g orbitals giving the configuration \(\mathrm{t}_{2 \mathrm{~g}}^{4} \mathrm{e}_{\mathrm{g}}^{0}\), thus forming low spin complexes. Such ligands for which ∆0 > P are called strong field ligands.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 11.
Discuss the nature of bonding in metal carbonyls.
Answer:
The metal-carbon bond in metal carbonyls have both sigma (σ) and pi (π) characters. The metal-carbon σ-bond is formed by the donation of lone pair of electrons of the carbonyl carbon to a vacant orbital of the metal. The metal- carbon re-bond is formed by the donation of a pair of electrons from a filled d-orbital of metal into the vacant
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 43

Question 12.
Explain the applications of Co-ordination compounds in different fields.
Answer:
Applications of Co-ordination compounds : Co-ordination compounds are of great importance. These compounds are widely present in the mineral, plant and animal worlds and are known to play many important functions in the area of analytical chemistry, metallurgy, biological systems, industry and medicine. These are described below.

Co-ordination compounds find use in many qualitative and quantitative chemical analysis. The familiar colour reactions given by metal ions with a number of ligands (especially chelating ligands), as a result of formation of co-ordination enitites, form the basis for their detection and estimation by classical and instrumental methods of analysis. Examples of such reagents include EDTA, DMG (dimethylglyoxime), oc-nitroso-p-naphtol, cupron etc.

Hardness of water is estimated by simple titration with Na2EDTA. The Ca2+ and Mg2+ ions form stable complexes with EDTA. The selective estimation of these ions can be done due to difference in the stability constants of calcium and magnesium complexes.

Some important extraction processes of metals, like those of silver and gold, make use of complex formation. Gold for example, combines with cyanide in the presence of oxygen and water to form the co-ordination entity [Au(CN)2] in aqueous solution. Gold can be separated in metallic from this solution by the addition of zinc.

Similarly, purification of metals can be achieved through formation and subsequent decomposition of their coordination compounds. For example, impure nickel is converted to [Ni(CO)4], which is decomposed to yield pure nickel.

Co-ordination compounds are of great importance in biological systems. The pigment responsible for photosynthesis, chlorophyll, is a co-ordination compound of magnesium. Haemoglobin, the red pigment of blood which acts as oxygen carrier is a co-ordination compound of iron. Vitamin B12, cyanocobalamine, the anti-pernicious anaemia factor, is a coordination compound of cobalt. Among the other compounds of biological importance with coordinated metal ions are the enzymes like, carboxypeptidase A and carbonic anhydrase (catalysts of biological systems).

Co-ordination compounds are used as catalysts for many industrial processes. Examples include rhodium complex, [(Ph3P)3RhCl], a Wilkinson catalyst, is used for the hydrogenation of alkenes.

Articles can be electroplated with silver and gold much more smoothly and evenly fr6m solutions of the complexes, [Ag(CN)2] and. [Au(CN)2] than from a solution of simple metal ions.

In black and white photography, the developed film is fixed by washing with hypo solution which dissolves the undecomposed AgBr to form a complex ion, [Ag(S2O3)2]3-.

There is growing interest in the use of chelate therapy in medicinal chemisty. An example is the treatment of problems caused by the presence of metals in toxic proportions in plant/animal systems. Thus, excess of copper and iro are removed by the chelating ligands D-penicillamine and desferrioxime B via the formation of coordination compounds. EDTA is used in the treatment of lead poisoning. Some co-ordination compounds of platinum effectively inhibit the growth of tumours. Examples are : cis-platin and related compounds.

Textual Examples

Question 1.
On what ground can you say that scandium (Z = 21) is a transition element but zinc (Z = 30) is not ?
Solution:
On the basis of incompletely filled 3d orbitals in case of scandium atom in its atomic state (3d1), it is regarded as a transition element. On the other hand, zinc atom has completely filled d orbitals (3d10) in its ground state as well as in its oxidised state, hence it is not regarded as a transition element.

Question 2.
Why do the transition elements exhibit higher enthapies of atomisation ?
Solution:
Because of large number of unpaired electrons in their atoms they have stronger interatomic interaction and hence stronger bonding between atoms resulting in higher enthalpies of atomisation.

Question 3.
Name at transition element which does not exhibit variable oxidation states.
Solution:
Scandium (Z = 21) does not exhibit variable oxidation states.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 4.
Why is Cr2+ reducing and Mn3+ oxidising when both have d4 configuration ?
Solution:
Cr22+ is reducing as its configuration changes from d4 to d3, the latter having a half-filled t2g level. On the other hand; the change from Mn2+ to Mn3+ results in the half-filled (d<sup5) configuration which has extra stability.

Question 5.
How would you account for the increasing oxidising power in the series VO2+ < Cr2O72- < MnO4?
Solution:
This is due to the increasing stability of the lower species to which they are reduced.

Question 6.
For the first row transition metals the E values are
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 44
Explain the non-regularity in the above values.
Solution:
The E (M2+/M) values are not regular which can be explained from the non-regular variation of ionisation enthalpies (∆iH1 + ∆iH2) and also the sublimation enthalpies which are relatively much less for manganese and vanadium.

Question 7.
Why is the E value for the Mn3+/Mn2+ couple much more positive than that for Cr3+/ Cr2+ or Fe3+/Fe2+ ? Explain.
Solution:
Much larger third ionisation energy of Mn (where the required change is d5 to d4) is mainly responsible for this. This also explains why the +3 state of Mn is of little importance.

Question 8.
Calculate the magnetic moment of a divalent ion in aqueous solution if its atomic number is 25. [A.P. Mar. 16]
Solution:
With atomic number 25, the divalent ion in aqueous solution will have d5 configuration (five unpaired electrons). The magnetic moment, μ is μ = \(\sqrt{5(5+2)}\) = 5.92 BM

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 9.
What is meant by ‘disproportionation’ of an oxidation state ? Give an example.
Solution:
When a particular oxidation state becomes less stable relative to other oxidation states, one lower, one higher, it is said to undergo disproportionation. For example, manganese (VI) becomes unstable relative to manganese (VII) and manganese (TV) in acidic solution.
3MnVIO42- + 4H+ → 2MnVIIO4 + MnIVO2 + H2O

Question 10.
Name a member of the lanthanoid series which is well known to exhibit +4 oxidation state.
Solution:
Cerium (Z = 58)

Question 11.
On the basis of the following observations made with aqueous solutions, assign secondary valencies to metals in the following compounds.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 45
Solution:
i) Secondary 4 ii) Secondary 6 iii) Secondary 6 iv) Secondary 6 v) Secondary 4

Question 12.
Write the formulas for the following Co-ordination compounds
a) Tetraammineaquachloro cobalt (III) chloride
b) Potassium tetrahydroxozincate (II)
c) Potassium trioxalatoaluminate (III)
d) Dichlorobis (ethane-1, 2-diamine) cobalt (III)
e) Tetracarbonylnickel (0)
Solution:
a) [Co(NH3)4(H2O)Cl]Cl2
b) K2[Zn(OH)4]
c) K3[Al(C2O4)3]
d) [CoCl2(en)2]+
e) [Ni(CO)4]

Question 13.
Write the IUPAC names of the following coordination compounds.
a) [Pt(NH3)2Cl(NO2)]
b) K3[Cr(C2O<sub4)3]
c) [CoCl2(en)2]Cl
d) [Co(NH3)5(CO3)]Cl
e) Hg[Co(SCN)4]
Solution:
a) Diamminechloronitrito-N-platinum (II)
b) Potassium trioxalatochromate (III)
c) Dichlorobis (ethane-1, 2-diamine) cobalt (III) chloride
d) Pentaairuninecarbonatocobalt (III) chloride
e) Mercury tetrathiocyanocobaltate (III)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 14.
Why is geometrical isomerism not possible in tetrahedral complexes having two different types of unidentate ligands Co-ordinated with the central metal ion ?
Solution:
Tetrahedral complexes do not show geometrical isomerism because the relative positions of the unidentate ligands attached to the central metal atom are the same with respect to each other.

Question 15.
Draw structures of geometrical isomers of [Fe(NH3)2(CN)4]
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 46

Question 16.
Out of the following two Co-ordination entities which is chiral (optically active) ?
a) cis-(CrCl2(ox)2]3-
b) trans-[CrCl2(ox)2]3-
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 47
Out of the two, (a) cis-(CrCl2(ox)2]3- is chiral (optically active).

Question 17.
The spin only magnetic moment of [MnBr4]2- is 5.9 BM. Predict the geometry of the complexion?
Solution:
Since the Co-ordination number of Mn2+ ion in the complex ion is 4, it will be either tetrahedral (sp3 hybridisation) or square planar (dsp2 hybridisation). But the fact that the magnetic moment of the complex ion is 5.9 BM, it should be tetrahedral in shape rather than square planar because of the presence of five unpaired electrons in the d-orbitals.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Silver atom has completely filled d-orbitals (4d10) in its ground State. How can you say that it is a transition element ?
Solution:
Silver (atomic no. = 47), in its +1 oxidation state exhibits 4d105s0 configuration. But in some compounds it also shows +2 oxidation state, i.e., 4d95s0 configuration. Here d-orbital is not completely filled. Therefore, silver is a transition element.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 2.
In the series Sc (Z = 21) to Zn (Z = 30), the enthalpy of atomisation of zinc is the lowest, i.e., 126 kJ mol-1, why ?
Solution:
In zinc (3d104s1) d-orbital is complete so the electrons of d-orbital are not involved in bonding. So, metallic bond is weaker than the other elements of the series, where the electrons of d-orbitals are involved in metallic bonds. So, enthalpy of atomisation of zinc is lowest in its transition series.

Question 3.
Which of the 3d series of the transition metals exhibits the largest number of oxidation states and why ?
Solution:
Manganese (atomic no. = 25) has electronic configuration [Ar] 3d54s2. It shows maximum number of oxidation states, i.e., from +2 to +7 (+2, +3, +4, +5, +6, +7) in its compounds.

Question 4.
The E°(M2+/M) value for copper is positive (+0.34 V). What is possibly the reason for this ?
Answer:
E° (M2+/M) value for any metal depends on three factors : •
i) ∆aH (Enthalpy of atomisation); M(s). + ∆aH → M(g)
ii) ∆iH (Enthalpy of ionisation); M(g) + ∆iH → M2+(g)
iii) ∆hydH (Hydration enthalpy); M2+(g) + (aq → M2+(aq)
Copper has high value of enthalpy of atomisation and low value of enthalpy of hydration. It means that ∆iH required is not compensated by the energy released. Therefore, E0(Cu2+/Cu) is positive.

Question 5.
How would you account for the irregular variation of ionisation enthalpies (first and second) in the first series of the transition elements ?
Solution:
In the first transition series, there is irregular variation of ionisation enthalpies because the stability of 3d configuration differs to some extent. Generally the ionisation enthalpy increases with increase in effective nuclear charge, Thus, it is lower for Cr due to absence of any change in the d-configuration while high for Zn as it represents an jonisation from the 4s level. Second ionisation energy, shows the removal of second. The configurations like d5 and d10 are exceptionally stable. So, they have high ionisation enthalpies.

Question 6.
Why is the highest oxidation state of a metal exhibited in its oxide or fluoride only ?
Solution:
Oxygen as well as fluorine both have high values of electronegativity. So, in their compounds (oxides and fluorides) they can oxidise the metal to their highest oxidation states.

Question 7.
Which is the stronger reducing agent Cr2+ or Fe2+ and why ?
Solution:
Cr2+ is a stronger reducing agent than Fe2+. The E° values are
Cr3+/Cr2+ = -0-41 V and E0Fe3+/Fe2+ = 0.77 V
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 48
Therefore, Cr2+ is stronger reducing agent (itself gets oxidised easily) than Fe2+.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 8.
Calculate the ‘spin only’ magnetic moment of M2+(aq) ion (Z = 27).
Solution:
Electronic configuration of M(Z = 27) is [Ar] 3d7 4s2
Electronic configuration of M2+ = [Ar]3d7 or AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 49
Three unpaired electrons are present in M2+ (aq) ion. i.e., n = 3. Applying ‘spin only1 formula for magnetic moment.
μ = \(\sqrt{n(n+2)}\) = \(\sqrt{3(3+2)}\) = \(\sqrt{15}\) BM = 3.87 BM
Note : Unit of magnetic moment is Bohr Magnetons (BM).

Question 9.
Explain why Cu+ ion is not stablein aqueous solutions ?
Solution:
In aqueous solution, Cu+(aq) undergoes disproportionation reaction as follows.
2Cu+(aq) → Cu2+(aq) + Cu(s)
The higher stability of Cu2+ (aq) in aqueous solution is due to higher negative enthalpy of hydration ∆hydH° than that of Cu+(aq). It compensates the second IE of Cu involved in the formation of Cu2+ ion. Hence, Cu+ ion changes to more stable Cu2+ ion in aqueous medium.

Question 10.
Actinoid contraction is greater from element to element than lanthanoid contraction ?
Solution:
The decrease in atomic (or ionic) radii in actinoid elements (actinoid contraction) is greater than lanthanoid contraction because 5f-electrons have poor shielding effect as compared to 4f- electrons. Therefore, the effect of increased nuclear charge leading to contraction in size is more in case of actinoid elements.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 11.
Write the formulae for the following Co-ordination compounds
i) Tetraamminediaquacobalt (III) chloride,
ii) Potassium tetracyanonickelate (II)
iii) Tris-(ethane-l, 2-diamine) chromium (m) chloride
iv) Amminebromidochloridonitrito-N-platinate (II)
v) Dichlorido bis-(ethane-1,2-diamine) platinum (IV) nitrate
Solution:
i)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 50
To find the value of x, we have to find the charge on the complex.
III
[CO(NH3)4 (H2O)2]x+ + 3 + 4 × 0 + 2 × 0 = x, × = +3
o, the formula of the complex is [CO(NH3)4 (H2O)2]Cl3.

ii)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 51
To find the value of x, find the charge on the complex.
[Ni(CN)4]x- (as K+ is positive)
+2 + (-1) x 4 = – x
-x = -2 or x = + 2
So, the formula of the complex is K2[Ni(CN)4].
Similarly
iii) [Cr(en)3]Cl3
iv) [Pt(NH3) BrCl(NO2)]
v) [PtCl2(en)2] (NO3)2
vi) Fe4[Fe(CN)6]3

Question 12.
Write the IUPAC names of the following Co-ordination compounds.
(i) [Co(NH3)6]Cl3
(ii) [Co(NH3)5Cl]Cl2
(iii) K3[Fe(CN)6]
(iv) K3[Fe(C2O4)3]
(v) K2[PdCl4]
(vi) [Pt(NH3)2Cl(NH2CH3)Cl.
Solution:
i)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 52
Let the oxidation state of Co be x.
x + (0)6 + (-1) × 3 = 0, x + 0 – 3 = 0, x = +3
So, the name of this complex is hexaamminecobalt (III) chloride,

ii) [CO(NH3)5Cl]Cl2
x + (0) × 5 + (-1) × 1 + (-1) × 2 = 0, x + 0 – 3 = 0, x =.+ 3
So, the name of the complex is pentaamminechloridocobalt (III) chloride
[K3[Fe(CN)6]

iii)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 53
Let the oxidation state of Fe is x.
(+ 1) 3 + x + (-1) 6 = 0, + 3 + x – 6 = 0, x = + 3
So, the name of the complex is potassium hexacyanoferrate (III) .

iv)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 54
Let the oxidation state of Fe is x.
(+ 1) 3 + x + (-2) 3 = 0 [∵ Oxalate ion (C2O42-) bears – 2 charge.]
3 + x- 6 = 0, x = +3
So, the name of the complex is potassium trioxalateferrate (III).

v)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 55
Let the oxidation state of Pd is x.
(+ 1) 2 + x + (-1) 4 = 0, 2 + x – 4 = 0, x = + 2 .
So, the name of the complex is potassium tetrachloridopalladate (II).

vi)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 56
Let the oxidation state of Pt is x.
x + (0) 2 + (-1) × 1 + 0 + (-1) × 1 = 0
x + 0- 1 + 0 -1 = 0, x – 2 = 0, x = + 2
So, the name of the complex is diamminechlorido (methylamine) platinum (II) chloride.

Question 13.
Indicate the types of isomerism exhibited by the following complexes and draw the structures for these isomers :
(i) K[Cr(H2O)2(C2O4)2]
(ii) [Co(en)3]Cl3
(iii) [Co(NH3)5(NO2)](NO3)2
(iv) [Pt(NH3)(H2O)Cl2]
Solution:
i) [Cr(H2O)2(C2O4)2] or K[Cr(H2O)2(ox)2] :
(where, ox = oxalate ion)
a) It exists as geometrical isomers : cis and trans forms.
(In cis form, the same groups occupy adjacent positions while in trans form, they are present at alternate positions.)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 57
b) The cis isomer can also exist as a pair of optical isomers (i.e., d-and 1- forms) (due to absence of plane of symmetry).

ii) [Co(en)3]Cl3 : It has two optical isomers (i.e. d-and 1-forms)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 58

iii) [Co(NH3)5(NO2)](NO3)2 : It can exist as a pair of ionization isomers as well as linkage iosmers.
Ionization isomers :
[Co(NH3)5(NO2)](NO3)2 and [Co(NH3)5(NO3)](NO2) (NO3) as they give different ions on ionization.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 59
Linkage isomers : [Co(NH3)5(NO2)](NO3)2 and [CO(NH3)5ONO](NO3)2

iv) [Pt(NH3)(H2O)Cl2] : It can exist as two geometrical iosmers. .
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 60

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 14.
Give evidence that [Co(NH3)5Cl]SO4 and [CO(NH3)5SO4]Cl are ionization isomers.
Solution:
We dissolve both the compounds in water in separate test tubes. To the both test tube
I Step or I Test: Add BaCl2 solution One compound give white ppt., indicating the presence of SO42- ions.
The other compound does not give white ppt, indicating the absence of SO42- ions.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 61

II Test: Add AgNO3 solution to both the Compounds in separate test tubes :
Only [II] compound gives white ppt, not the [I] one, due to absence of Cl as counter ion.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 62
These two tests prove that the given two compounds are a pair of ionization isomers.

Question 15.
Explain on the basis of valence bond theory that [Ni(CN)4]2- ion with square planar structure is diamagnetic and the [NiCl4] ion with tetrahedral geometry is paramagnetlc.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 63
(Cl being weak field ligand, cannot cause pairing.)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 64
[NiCl4]2- ion is paramagnetic in nature as it has two unpaired electrons.

Question 16.
[NiCl4]2- is paramagnetic while [Ni(CO)4] is diamagnetic though both are tetrahedral.
Solution:
In the complex [NiCl4]2- Ni is in +2 oxidation state and has the configuration 3d84s0. The cr ion being a weak field ligand cannot pair the two unpaired electrons present in 3d-orbitals. This means that 3d-orbitals are not involved in hybridization. Thus, the complex is sp3 hybridized (tetrahedral) and.is paramagnetic in nature.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 65
In the complex [Ni(CO)4], the oxidation state of nickel is zero and electronic configuration is 3d84s2. In the presence of the ligand CO, the 4s-electrons shift to the two half-filled 3d-orbitals and make all the electrons paired. The valence 4s and 4p-orbitals are involved in hybridization. Thus, the complex is tetrahedral but diamagnetic in nature.
Outer configuration of Ni atom = 3d8 4s2.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 66

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 17.
[Fe(H2O)6]3+ is strongly paramagnetic whereas [Fe(CN)6]3- is weakly paramagnetic Explain.
Solution:
Outer configuration of 26Fe = 3ds64s2. In both the complexes Fe is present as Fes3+ ion.
Fes3+ ion = 3d54s0
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 67
In the presence of CN (a strong field ligand) the 3d-electrons pair up leaving only one unpaired electron. The hybridization is d2sp3 forming an inner orbital complex.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 68
In the presence of H2O, (a weak field ligand), 3d-electrons do not pair up. The hybridization is sp3d2 forming an outer orbital complex containing five unpaired electrons. Hence, it is strongly paramagnetic.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 69

Question 18.
Explain [Co(NH3)6]3+ is an inner orbital complex whereas [Ni(NH3)6]2+ is an outer orbital complex.
Solution:
In [Co(NH3)6]3+, CO is present as Co3+ arid has 3d0 configuration.
In the presence of NH3, the 3d-electrons pair up leaving two d-orbitals empty to the involved in d2sp3 hybridization forming inner orbital complex in the case of [Co(NH3)6]3+.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 70
Since, (n – 1) d-orbitals are not available but the nd-orbitals are used in bond formation i.e., in hybridization, the complex is called outer orbital complex.

Question 19.
Predict the number of unpaired electrons in the square planar [Pt(CN)4]2- ion.
Solution:
78Pt is present in group 10 of the Periodic Table. Its outer configuration is 5d96s1.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 71
For square plannar shape, the hybridization is dsp2. Hence, the unpaired electrons in 5d- orbital pair up to make one d-orbital empty for dsp2 hybridization. Thus, there is no unpaired electron.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds

Question 20.
The hexaquo manganese (II) ion contains five unpaired electrons, while the hexacyano ion contains only one unpaired electron. Explain using crystal field theory.
Solution:
Mn(II) ion has 3d5 configuration. In the presence of H2O molecules (acting as weak field ligands), the distribution of these five electrons is \(\mathrm{t}_{2 \mathrm{~g}}^3 \mathrm{e}_{\mathrm{g}}^2\) all the electrons remain unpaired to form a high spin complex.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 72
However, in the presence of CN (acting as strong field ligands), the distribution of these electrons is \(\mathrm{t}_{2 \mathrm{~g}}^5 \mathrm{e}_{\mathrm{g}}^0\), i.e., two t2g orbitals contain paired electrons while the third t2g orbital contains one unpaired electron. The complex formed is a low spin complex.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 7 d and f Block Elements & Coordination Compounds 73

Question 21.
Calculate the overall complex dissociation equilibrium constant for the Cu(NH3)42+ ions, given that β4 for this complex is 2.1 × 1013.
Solution:
Overall complex dissociation equilibrium constant
= \(\frac{1}{\beta_4}\) = \(\frac{1}{2.1 \times 10^{13}}\)
= 4.7 × 10-14

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(d) Group-18 Elements Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What inspired Bartlett for carrying out reaction between Xe and PtF6 ?
Answer:

  1. At first Bartlett prepared a red compound \(\mathrm{O}_2^{+}+\mathrm{PtF}_6^{-}\)
  2. As the first Ionisation Enthalpy of molecular oxygen is identical with that the Xe.
  3. He made efforts to prepare same type of compound with Xe and was successful in preparing another red colour compound Xe+ \(\mathrm{PtF}_6^{-}\) by mixing PtF6 and Xe.

Question 2.
Which of the following does not exist ?
a) XeOF4
b) NeF2
c) XeF2
d) XeF6
Answer:
Given compounds are XeOF4, NeF2, XeF2, XeF6.
NeF2 does not exist among the above compounds.

Reason : Due to small size and high I.E. of ‘Ne’. It does not form chemical compounds.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Question 3.
Why do noble gases have comparatively large atomic sizes ?
Answer:
Noble gases have comparatively large atomic sizes as they have vander waals radii which is larger than both the ionic and covalent radii.

Question 4.
List out the uses of Neon. [A.P. Mar. 18]
Answer:
Uses of Ne:

  1. Ne is used in discharge tubes and fluor escent bulbs for advertisement display purpose.
  2. ‘Ne’ – bulbs are used in botanical gardens and in green houses.

Question 5.
Write any two uses of argon.
Answer:
Uses of Ar :

  1. ‘Ar’ is used to create inert atmosphere in high temperature net allurgical process.
  2. ‘Ar’ is ued in filling electric bulbs.

Question 6.
In modern diving apparatus, a mixture of He and O2 is used – Why ? [A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
In modem diving apparatus, a mixture of He and O2 is used because He is very low soluble in blood.

Question 7.
Helium is heavier than hydrogen. Yet helium is used (instead of H2) in filling baloons for meteorological observations – Why ?
Answer:
‘He’ is a non-inflammable and light gas. Hence it is used in filling baloons for meterological observations.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Question 8.
How is XeO3 prepared ?
Answer:
XeF6 on hydrolysis produce XeO3
XeF6 + 3H2O → XeO3 + 6HF

Question 9.
Give the preparation of
a) XeOF4 and
b) XeOaF2
Answer:
Partial hydrolysis of XeF6 gives oxy fluorides XeOF4 and XeO2F2
XeF6 + H2O → XeOF4 + 2HF
XeF6 + 2H2O → XeO2F2 + 4HF

Question 10.
Explain the structure of XeO3. [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Structure of XeO3

  1. Central atom is ‘Xe’
  2. ‘Xe’ under goes sp3 hybridisation in 3rd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 1
  3. ‘Xe’ forms 3σ-bonds and 3π-bonds with three oxygens.
  4. Shape of molecule is pyramidal with bond angle 103°.

Question 11.
Noble gases are inert – explain.
Answer:
Noble gases are chemically inert:

  1. Noble gases have stable electronic configuration coctet configuration except He)
  2. Noble gas have high Ionisation energy values and have large positive values of electron gain Enthalpy.

Question 12.
Write the name and formula of the first noble gas compound prepared by Bertlett.
Answer:
The first noble gas compound prepared by Bertlett is XePtF6. Name of the compound is xenon hexa fluoro platinate.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Question 13.
ExplaIn the shape of XeF4 on the basis of VSEPR theory
Answer:
Shape of XeF4:

  1. Central atom in XeF4 is ‘Xe’.
  2. Xe undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation in it’s 2nd excited. state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 2
  3. Shape of the molecule is square planar with bond angle 90° and bond length 1 .95Å.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 3
  4. Xe – forms four o-bonds by the overlap of sp3d2 – 2pz(F) orbitals.

Question 14.
Give the outer electronic configuration of noble gases.
Answer:
The outer electronic configuration of noble gases is ns2np6 (except He (1s2)

Question 15.
Why do noble gases form compounds with fluorine and oxygen only ?
Answer:
Noble gases form compounds with flourine and oxygen only.
Reason : Oxygen and Fluorine are most electronegative elements.

Question 16.
How is XeOF4 prepared ? Describe its molecular shape.
Answer:
Partial hydrolysis of XeF6 gives XeOF4
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 4
XeF6 + H2O → XeOF4 + 2HF
XeOF4 is a colourless volatile liquid it has a square pyramidal shape.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Question 17.
What is the major source of helium ?
Answer:
The major source of helium is natural gas.

Question 18.
Which noble gas is radioactive ? How is it formed ?
Answer:
Radon (Rn) is radio active noble gas. Radon is obtained as decay product of 86Ra226
86Ra22686Rn222 + 2He4

Question 19.
Name the following :
a) most abundant noble gas in atmosphere
b) radioactive noble gas
c) noble gas with least boiling point
d) noble gas forming large number of compounds
e) noble gas not present in atmosphere
Answer:
a) Argon is the most abundant noble gas in atmosphere.
b) Radon is the radio active noble gas.
c) Helium has lowest boiling point (4.2K)
d) Xenon forms large number of compounds.
e) Radon is not present in atmosphere.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
How are Xenon fluorides XeF2, XeF4 and XeF6 obtained?
Answer:
Xenon forms the binary fluorides XeF2, XeF4, XeF6 as follows. These are formed by direct combination of Xe and F2.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 5

Question 2.
How are XeO3 and XeOF4 prepared? [Mar. 14]
Answer:
XeF6 on hydrolysis produce XeO3
XeF6 + 3H2O → XeO3 + 6HF
Partial hydrolysis of XeF6 gives XeOF4
XeF6 + H2O → XeOF4 + 2HF

Question 3.
Give the formulae and describe the structures of a noble gas species, isoelectronic with
a) ICl4
b) IBr2
c) BrO3
Answer:
a) ICl4 is also electronic with XeF4 and it has square planar shape.
b) IBr2 is also electronic with XeF2 and it has linear shape.
c) BrO3 is also electronic with XeO4 and it has tetrahedral shape.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Question 4.
Explain the reaction of the following with water.
a) XeF2
b) XeF4
c) XeF6
Answer:
a) XeF2 is hydrolysed to form Xe, HF and O2
2XeF2 + 2H2O → 2Xe + 4HF + O2

b) XeF4 is hydrolysed to give XeO3
6XeF4 + 12H2O → 4Xe + 2XeO3 + 24 HF + 3O2

c) XeF6 undergo hydrolysis to form XeO3
XeF6 + 3H2O → XeO3 + 6HF
XeF6 undergo partial hydrolysis to form XeOF4 + XeO2F2
XeF6 + H2O → XeOF4 + 2HF
XeF6 + 2H2O → XeO2F2 + 4HF

Question 5.
Explain the structures of [A.P. Mar. 18] [Mar. 14]
a) XeF2 and
b) XeF4
Answer:
a) Structure of XeF2 :

  1. In XeF2 central atom is ‘Xe’.
  2. ‘Xe’ undergoes sp3d hybridisation in it’s 1st excited state
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 6
  3. Shape of molecule is linear
  4. Xe form two σ – bonds with two fluorines (sp3 – 2pz overlap)
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 7

b) Structure of XeF4 :

  1. Central atom in XeF4 is ‘Xe’.
  2. Xe undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation in it’s 2nd excited, state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 8
  3. Shape of the molecule is square planar with bond angle 90° and bond length 1.95Å.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 9
  4. Xe – forms four a – bonds by the overlap of sp3d2 – 2pz(F) orbitals.

Question 6.
Explain the structures of
a) XeF6 and
b) XeOF4
Answer:
a) Structure of XeF6 :

  1. Central atom in XeF6 is ‘Xe’
  2. Xe under goes sp3d3 hybridisation in it’s 3rd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 10
  3. Shape of molecule is distorted octahedral.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 11

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

b) Structure of α XeOF4

  1. In XeOF4 molecule ‘Xe’ under goes sp3d2 hybridisation.
  2. Shape of the molecule is square pyramid.
  3. There is one Xe-O double bond containing
    pπ = dπ overlaping.
    Partial hydrolysis of XeF6 gives XeOF4
    XeF6 + H2O → XeOF4 + 2HF
    XeOF4 is a colourless volatile liquid it has a square pyramidal shape.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 12

Question 7.
Complete the following.
a) XeF2 + H2O →
b) XeF2 + PF5
c) XeF4 + SbF5
d) XeF6 + ASF5
e) XeF4 + O2F2
f) NaF + XeF6
Answer:
a) 2XeF2 + 2H2O → 2Xe + 4HF + O2
b) XeF2 + PF5 → [XeF]+ + A[F6]
c) XeF4 + SbF5 → [XeF3]+ [SbF6]
d) XeF6 + ASF5 → [Xe2F11]+ [ASF6]
e) XeF4 + O2F2 → XeF6 + O2
f) NaF + XeF6 → Na+ [XeF7]

Question 8.
How are XeF2 and XeF4 prepared ? Give their structures. [T.S. Mar. 18]
Answer:
Xenon forms the binary fluorides XeF2, XeF4, XeF6 as follows. These are formed by direct combination of Xe and F2.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 13
Structure of XeF2

  1. In XeF2 central atom is Xe’.
  2. ‘Xe’ undergoes sp3d hybridisation in it’s 1st excited state
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 14
  3. Shape of molecule is linear.
  4. Xe form two σ bonds with two fluorines.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

b) Structure of XeF4 :

  1. Central atom in XeF4 is ‘Xe’.
  2. Xe undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation in it’s 2nd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 15
  3. Shape of the molecule is square planar with bond angle 90° and bond length 1.95Å.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 16
  4. Xe – forms four σ-bonds by the overlap of sp3d2 – 2pz (F) orbitals.

Long Answer Question

Question 1.
How are XeF2, XeF4 and XeF6 prepared ? Explain their reaction with water. Discuss their structures. [A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Xenon forms the binary fluorides XeF2, XeF4, XeF6 as follows. These are formed by direct combination of Xe and F2.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 17
Reaction with water:

  1. XeF2 is hydrolysed to form Xe, HF and O2
    2XeF2 + 2H2O → 2Xe + 4HF + O2
  2. XeF4 is hydrolysed to give XeO3
    6XeF4 + 12H2O → 4Xe + 2XeO3 + 24 HF + 3O2
  3. XeFg undergo hydrolysis to form XeO3
    XeF6 + 3H2O → XeOF3 + 6HF
  4. XeF6 undergo partial hydrolysis to form XeOF4 and XeO2F2
    XeF6 + H2O → XeOF4 + 2HF
    XeF6 + 2H3O → XeO2F2 + 4HF

Structure of XeF2:

  1. In XeF2 central atom is ‘Xe’.
  2. ‘Xe’ undergoes sp3d hybridisation in it’s 1st excited state
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 18
  3. Shape of molecule is linear.
  4. Xe form two σ-bonds with two fluorines.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 19

b) Structure of XeF4 :

  1. Central atom in XeF4 is ‘Xe’.
  2. Xe undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation in it’s 2nd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 20
  3. Shape of the molecule is square planar with bond angle 90° and bond length 1.95Å.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 21
  4. Xe – forms four σ-bonds by the overlap of sp3d2 – 2pz (F) orbitals.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Structure of XeF6 :

  1. Central atom in XeF6 is ‘Xe’
  2. Xe under goes sp3d3 hybridisation in it’s 3rd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 10
  3. Shape of molecule is distorted octahedral.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 11

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Why are the elements of group 18 known as noble gases ?
Solution:
The elements present in Group 18 have their valence shell orbitals completely filled and, therefore, react with a few elements only under certain conditions. Therefore, they are now known as noble gases.

Question 2.
Noble gases have very low boiling points. Why ?
Solution:
Noble gases being monoatomic have no interatomic forces except weak dispersion forces and therefore, they are liquefied at very low temperatures. Hence, they have low boiling points.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Question 3.
Does the hydrolysis of XeF6 lead to a redox reaction ?
Solution:
No, the products of hydrolysis are XeOF4 and XeO2F2 where the oxidation states of all the elements remain the same as it was in the reacting state.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Why is helium used in diving apparatus ?
Solution:
Helium is used in diving apparatus due to its very low solubility in blood.

Question 2.
Balance the following equation :
XeF6 + H2O → XeO2F2 + HF
Solution:
XeF6 + 2H2O → XeO2F2 + 4HF

Question 3.
Why has it been difficult to study the chemistry of radon ?
Solution:
Radon is a radioactive element with very short half-life of 3.82 days. That is why, the study of chemistry of radon is a difficult task.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(c) Group-17 Elements Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Which halogen produces O2 and O3 on passing through water?
Answer:
Fluorine produces O2 and O3 on passing through water.
3F2 + 3H2O → 6HF + O3
2F2 + 2H2O → 4HF + O2

Question 2.
Interhalogen compounds are more reactive than the constituent halogens except fluorine – explain.
Answer:
Inter halogen compounds are more reactive than halogens. This is because X – X’ bond in interhalogens is weaker than X – X bond in halogens except F – F bond.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 3.
What is the use of ClF3?
Answer:
ClF3 is very useful fluorinating agent and it is used for the production of VF6 in the enrichment
of U235.
U(s) + 3ClF3(l) → UF6(g) + 3ClF(g)

Question 4.
Write two uses of ClO2.
Answer:
Uses of ClO2:

  • ClO2 is highly reactive oxidising agent.
  • It is used as bleaching agent for paper pulp and textiles.
  • It is used in water treatment.

Question 5.
Why are halogens coloured?
Answer:
Halogens are coloured due to the absorption of radiations in visible region which results in the excitation of outer electrons to higher energy level. Halogens absorb different quanta of radiation and display different colours.

Question 6.
Write the reactions of F2 and Cl2 with water. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Fluorine produces O2 and O3 on passing through water.
3F2 + 3 H2O → 6HF + O3
2F2 +2 H2O → 4HF + O2

Chlorine dissolves in water giving a solution of chlorine water. A freshly prepared solution of chlorine water contains HCl and HOCl .
Cl2 + H2O → HCl + HOCl
HOCl is unstable and dissociates to give nascent oxygen
HOCl → HCl + (O)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 7.
With which neutral molecule, ClO is isoelectronic ? Is that molecule a Lewis base ? (Hint: ClF; Yes)
Answer:

  • ClO is isoelectronic with the neutral molecule ClF.
  • Yes. ClF is a Lewis base (Electron pair donar).

Question 8.
Arrange the following in the order of the property indicated for each set.
a) F2, Cl2, Br2, I2 – increasing bond dissociation enthalpy.
b) HF, HCl, HBr, HI – increasing acidic strength
c) HF, HCl, HBr, HI – increasing boiling points.
Answer:
a) Increasing bond’ dissociation enthalpy order
I2 < F2 < Br2 < Cl2

b) Increasing acidic strength order
HF < HCl < HBr < HI

c) Increasing boiling points order
HCl < HBr < HI < HF

Question 9.
Electron gain enthalpy of fluorine is less than that of chlorine – explain.
Answer:
The negative electron gain enthalpy of the fluorine is less them that of chlorine. This is due to small size of fluorine atom which results in strong inter electronic repulsions in the relatively small 2p orbitals of fluorine and thus the incoming electron does not experience much attraction.

Question 10.
HF is a liquid while HCl is a gas – explain.
Answer:
HF is a liquid due to the presence of inter molecular hydrogen bonding where as HCl is a gas due to there is no such type of bonding in it.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 11.
Bond dissociation enthalpy of F2 is less than that of Cl2 – explain.
Ans. Bond dissociation enthalpy of F2 is less than that of Cl2
Explanation:
In F2 molecule electron repulsions are greater among lone pairs because these lone pairs are much closer to each other than in case of Cl2.

Question 12.
Write the formulae of the compounds, in which oxygen has positive oxidation states and mention the oxidation states of oxygen in them.
Answer:

  • In OF2 and O2F2 oxygen has positive oxidation states.
  • In OF2, oxygen oxidation state is + 2.
  • In O2F2 oxygen oxidation state is + 1.

Question 13.
What is the use of O2F2 and I2O5?
Answer:
Use of O2F5:
O2F2 is a fluorinating agent. O2F2 oxidises plutonium to PUF6 and the reaction is used in removing plutonium as PUF6 from spent nuclear fuel.
Use of I2O5:
I2O5 is a good oxidising agent and is used in the estimation of carbon monoxide (CO).

Question 14.
Write two uses of hydrogen chloride.
Answer:
Uses of hydrogen chloride :

  • It is used in medicines and as a laboratory reagent.
  • It is used in the manufacturing of Cl2, NH4Cl and glucose (from com starch).
  • It is used in extracting glue from bones-and purifying bone black.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 15.
Explain the reactions of Cl2 with NaOH. [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:

  1. Reaction with cold dilute NaOH: Chlorine reacts with cold dilute NaOH to give sodium hypochlorite and sodium chloride.
    2 NaOH (cold, dil.) + Cl2 → NaCl + NaOCl + H2O
  2. Reaction with hot concentrated NaOH : Chlorine reacts with hot concentrated NaOH to give sodium chlorate and sodium chloride.
    3 Cl2 + 6 NaOH (hot, Conc.) → 5 NaCl + NaClO3 + 3 H2O

Question 16.
What happens when Cl2 reacts with dry slaked lime ? [A.P. Mar. 16, 15]
Answer:
Chlorine reacts with dry slaked lime and forms bleaching powder.
Ca(OH)2 + Cl2 → CaOCl2 + H2O

Question 17.
Chlorine acts as an oxidizing agent – explain with two examples.
Answer:
Chlorine acts as oxidising agent.
Example – 1: Cl2 oxidises Iodine to Iodate .
I2 + 6 H2O + 5 Cl2 → 2HIO3 + 10 HCl
Example – 2 : Cl2 oxidises Sodium Sulphite to Sodium Sulphate
Cl2 + Na2SO3 + H2O → Na2SO4 + 2 HCl

Question 18.
What is aqua regia ? Write its reaction with gold and platinum.
Answer:
A mixture of 3 parts of Cone. HCl and one part of Cone. HNO3 constitutes aqua regia. It is used for dissolving noble metals.
It’s reaction with gold :
Au + 4H+ + \(\mathrm{NO}_3^{-}\) + 4Cl → \(\mathrm{AuCl}_4^{-}\) + NO + 2 H2O
It’s reaction with Platinum
3Pt + 16H+ + 4\(\mathrm{NO}_3^{-}\) + 18 Cl → \(3 \mathrm{PtCl}_6^{-2}\) + 4 NO + 8H2O

Question 19.
How is chlorine manufactured by Deacon’s method ? [T.S. & A.P. Mar. 19 & T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Deacon’s process : In Deacon’s process chlorine is obtained by the oxidation of hydrogen chloride gas by atmospheric oxygen in the presence of CuCl2 (catalyst) at 723 K.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 1

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 20.
Chlorine acts as a bleaching agent only in the presence of moisture – explain.
Answer:
Moist chlorine is a powerful bleaching agent. This bleaching property is due to oxidation.
Cl2 + H2O → 2HCl + (O)
Ex : Coloured substance + (O) → colourless substance.

Question 21.
The decreasing order of acidic character among hypohalogen acids is HClO > HBrO >HIO. Give reason.
Answer:
Given the decreasing order of acidic character among hypohalogen acids is
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 2
HaO > HBrO > HIO
From the above mentioned Ka values the given order of hypohalogen acids – acid strength order is
HClO > HBrO > HIO

Question 22.
The acidic nature of the oxoacids of chlorine is
HOCl < HClO2 < HClO3 < HClO4 – explain.
(Hint: HA + H2O ⇌ H3O+ + A conjugate base, greater the stability of A, lesser will be its basic strength or greater will be the tendency of HA to release H+. In other words, stronger will be the acid HA. Among the conjugate bases of oxoacids of chlorine, the stability order is HOCl < \(\mathrm{ClO}_2^{-}\) > \(\mathrm{ClO}_3^{-}\) > \(\mathrm{ClO}_4^{-}\))
Answer:
Given the acidic nature of oxoacids of chlorine is
HOCl < H\(\mathrm{ClO}_2^{-}\) > H\(\mathrm{ClO}_3^{-}\) > \(\mathrm{ClO}_4^{-}\)
HA + H2O ⇌ H3O+ + A conjugate base, greater the stability of A, lesser will be its basic strength or greater will be the tendency of HA to release H+. In other words, stronger will be the acid HA. Among the conjugate bases of oxoacids of chlorine, the stability order is
HOCl < H\(\mathrm{ClO}_2^{-}\) > H\(\mathrm{ClO}_3^{-}\) > H\(\mathrm{ClO}_4^{-}\)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 23.
What are interhalogen compounds ? Give two examples.
Answer:
The binary diamagnetic compounds of halogens which are formed by the reaction of halogens among themselves are called interhalogen compounds.
E.g.: IF7, ClF3, BrF3, ClF, IF3 etc.

Question 24.
Explain the structure of ClF3.
Answer:
Structure of ClF3:

  • Central atom in ClF3 is ‘Cl’
  • Excited state electronic configuration of ‘Cl’ is
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 3
  • Cl atom undergoes sp3d hybridisation
  • It is a bent T-shaped molecule (or) trigonal bipyramidal with 2 – positions occupied by lone pairs.

Question 25.
OF2 should be called oxygen difluolide and not fluorine oxide – Why ?
Answer:
OF2 should be called oxygen difluoride and riot fluoride oxide.
The binary compotmds of oxygen with fluoride are not pronounced as oxides because the electronegativity of fluorine is greater than oxygen.

Question 26.
Iodine is more soluble in KI than in water – Explain.
Answer:
Iodine is more soluble in KI than in water.

Reason:
Iodine combine with KI forming soluble complex KI3.
KI + I2 → KI3 (Soluble complex)
Iodine does not dissolve in water. This is due to positive free energy change (+ ∆G)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 27.
Among the hydrides of halogens
a) Which is most stable ?
b) Which is most acidic ?
c) Which has lowest boiling point ?
Answer:
a) Among hydrides of halogens HF is most stable.
b) Among hydrides of halogens HI is most acidic.
c) Among hydrides of halogens HCl (189K) has lowest boiling point.

Question 28.
Compare the bleaching action of Cl2 and SO2.
Answer:

  • Cl2 is a powerful bleaching agent. This bleaching action is due to oxidation.
    Cl2 + H2O → 2HCl+ (O)
    Coloured substance + (O) → colourless substance.
  • It bleaches vegetable or organic matter in the presence of moisture. Bleaching effect of Cl2 is permanent.
  • SO2 acts as bleaching agent in presence of moisture.
    SO2 + 2 H2O → H2SO4 + 2[H]
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 4
  • SO2 bleaches wool and silk.

Question 29.
Give the oxidation states of halogens in the following :
a) Cl2O
b) \(\mathrm{ClO}_2^{-}\)
c) KBrO3
d) NaClO4
Answer:
a) Cl2O :
2x – 2 = 0
x = -+ 1
Oxidation state of chlorine in Cl2O is + 1.

b) \(\mathrm{ClO}_2^{-}\)
x + 2(-2) = -1
x = -1 + 4 = +3
In latex]\mathrm{ClO}_2^{-}[/latex] the oxidation state of ‘Cl’ is + 3

c) KBrO3 :
1 + x + 3 (-2) = 0
x = + 5
In KBrO3 the oxidation state of Br is + 5.

d) NaClO4
1 + x + 4(-2) = 0
x = + 7
In NaClO4 the oxidation state of Cl is + 7.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 30.
Describe the molecular shape of \(\mathrm{I}_3^{-}\) .
(Hint: Central iodine is of sp3d. – linear)
Answer:

  • In Tri iodide ion central iodine atom undergo sp3d hybridisation.
  • It contains three lone pairs and two bond pairs.
  • According to VSEPR theory it has linear shape.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 5

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
How can you prepare Cl2 from HCl and HCl from Cl2 ? Write the reactions.
Answer:
Preparation of Cl2 from HCl:

  • On heating MnO2 with Conc. HCl, Cl2 gas is liberated
    MnO2 + 4HCl → MnCl2 + Cl2 + 2H2O
  • By the Õxidation of HCl gas by atmospheric oxygen in presence of CuCl2 catalyst at 723 K.
    4 HCl + O2 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 6 2Cl2 + 2 H2O

Preparation of HCl from Cl2:

  • Cl2 when reacted with H2 to form HCl
    H2(g) + Cl2(g) → 2HCl(g)

Question 2.
Write balanced equations for the following.
a) NaCl is heated with Conc.H2SO4 In the presence of MnO2.
b) Chlorine is passed into a solution of Nal ¡n water.
Answer:
a) NaCl is heated with Conc.H2SO4 in presence of MnO2 liberates Cl2 gas.
4 NaCl + MnO2 + 4 H2SO4 → MnCl2 + 4 NaHSO4 + 2 H2O + Cl2.

b) When chlorine water is added to a solution of sodium iodide a brown colour is formed.
Cl2 + 2 NaI → 2 NaCl + I2

Question 3.
Explain the structures of
a) BrF5 and
b) IF2.
Answer:
a) Structure of BrF5.

  • Central atom in BrF5 is Br.
  • ‘Br’ undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation in 2nd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 7
  • Shape of the molecule is octahedral with one position occupied by a lone pair (or) square pyramidal.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

b) Structure of IF7 :

  • Central atom in IF7 is T.
  • T undergoes sp3d3 hybridisation in 3rd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 8
  • Shape of the molecule is Penta gonal bipyramid structure
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 9

Question 4.
Write a short note on the hydrides of halogens.
Answer:
Hydrides of halogens :
Formation :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 10
These compounds dissolve in water to form hydrohalic acids.
Boiling points HF – 293 K
HCl – 189K
HBr – 206 K
HI – 238 K
The decreasing order of stability of these compounds is
HF > HCl > HBr > HI
The increasing order of acidic strength of these compounds
HF < HCl < HBr < HI

Question 5.
How is chlorine obtained in the laboratory ? How does it react with the following ? [T.S. Mar. 15]
a) cold dil. NaOH
b) excess NH3
c) KI
Answer:
In the laboratory chlorine is prepared by the oxidation of HCl with MnO2.
4 HCl + MnO2 → MnCl2 + 2 H2O + Cl2

a) Chlorine reacts with cold dil. NaOH to form sodium hypochlorite.
Cl2 + 2 NaOH → NaCl + NaOCl + H2O

b) Cl2 reacts with excess of NH3, Nitrogen and ammonium chloride are formed.
8 NH3 + 3 Cl2 → 6 NH4Cl + N2

c) Cl2 reacts with KI to liberate iodine
Cl2 + 2KI → 2 KCl + I2

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 6.
What are interhalogen compounds ? Give some examples to illustrate the definition. How are they classified ?
Answer:
The binary diamagnetic compounds of halogens which are formed by the reaction of halogens among themselves are called interhalogen compounds.
E.g.: IF7, ClF3, BrF3, ClF, IF3 etc.
The above examples are binary diamagnetic compounds and formed by* combination of halogens only. .
Inter halogen compounds are classified into four types.

  1. AX – Type : Eg : ClF, BrF
  2. AX3 – Type : Eg: ClF3, IF3
  3. AX5 – Type : Eg : ClF5, BrF5
  4. AX7 – Type : Eg : IF7

‘A’ is less electronegative halogen.
X is more electronegative halogens.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
How is ClF3 prepared ? How does it react with water ? Explain its structure.
Answer:
Preparation of ClF3: Chlorine reacts with excess of fluorine to form ClF3.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 11
Reaction with H2O: ClF3 reacts with water explosively and oxidises water to give oxygen or in controlled quantities oxygen diflouride (OF2) as well as HF and HCl.
ClF3 + 2H2O → 3 HF + HCl + O2
ClF3 + H2O → 4 HF + HCl + OF2
Structure of ClF3:

  • Central atom in ClF3 is ‘Cl’
  • Excited state electronic configuration of ‘Cl’ is
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 12
  • Cl atom undergoes sp3d hybridisation
  • It is a bent T-shaped molecule (or) trigonal bipyramidal with 2 – positions occupied by lone pairs.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 2.
How is chlorine prepared in the laboratory ? How does it react with the following ? [T.S. Mar. 19, 15]
a) Iron
b) hot, cone. NaOH
c) acidified FeSO4
d) Iodine
e) H2S
f) Na2S2O3
Answer:
In the laboratory chlorine is prepared by the oxidation of HCl with MnO2.
4 HCl + MnO2 → MnCl2 + 2 H2O + Cl2

a) Cl2 reacts with Iron to form FeCl3
2 Fe + 3Cl2 → 2 FeCl3

b) Cl2 reacts with hot Cone. NaOH to form sodium chloride and sodium chlorate
3Cl2 + 6 NaOH → 5 NaCl + NaClO3 + 3 H2O

c) Cl2 reacts with acidified FeSO4 and ferric ions are formed.
2 FeSO4 + H2SO4 + Cl2 → Fe2(SO4)3 + 2 HCl

d) Cl2 reacts with Iodine to form ICl
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 12

e) Cl2 reacts with H2S and forms HCl and ‘S’
Cl2 + H2S → 2 HCl + S

f) ‘S’ is precipitated by the reaction of Cl2 with Na2S2O3.
‘Na2S2O3 + Cl2 + H2O → Na2SO4 + 2 HCl + S

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 3.
Discuss the anomalous behaviour of fluorine.
Answer:
Abnormal behaviour of fluorine : Fluorine being the first element in the group differs considerably from other halogens. The reasons may be traced out to one or more of the following, characteristics.
F2 has

  1. a small size
  2. The highest electronegativity amongst the known elements.
  3. No d-orbital are available in its valence shell.
  4. Low enthalpy of F-F bond dissociation and
  5. Only two electrons are present in the penultimate shell while other halogens 8 electrons.

The abnormal characteristics of F2 can be summarised as follows.

  1. F2 exhibits -1 oxidation state because it is the most electronegative element known. Therefore, no higher oxidation state for it in its compounds.
  2. In it’s hydride HF, it has hydrogen bonding, but other halides of hydrogen do not show this property. HF can form \(\mathrm{HF}_2^{-}\) ion. No such ions are known with other halogens.
  3. It combines with carbon while others do not combine even under drastic conditions.
  4. F2 has a lower EA compared to that of Cl2 even though F2 is the most electronegative element.
  5. Fluorides have the highest ionic character among the halides.
    Example : AlF2 is ionic while AlCl3 is covalent compound.

Question 4.
How is chlorine prepared by electrolytic method ? Explain its reaction with [A.P. Mar. 16, 15]
a) NaOH and
b) NH3 under different conditions.
Answer:
Preparation of chlorine by electrolytic method : Chlorine is obtained by the electrolysis of brine solutions (Cone. NaCl). Cl2 gas is liberated at anode.
2 NaCl → 2 Na+ + 2Cl
2 H2O + 2e → 2 OH + H2 (cathode)
2 Cl → Cl2 + 2e (anode)
a)

  1. NaOH:
    Chlorine reacts with cold dil. NaOH to form sodium hypochlorite.
    Cl2 + 2 NaOH → NaCl + NaOCl + H2O
  2. Cl2 reacts with hot cone. NaOH to form sodium chloride and sodium chlorate.
    3 Cl2 + 6 NaOH → 5 NaCl + NaClO3 + 3 H2O

b)

  1. Cl2 reacts with excess of NH3, Nitrogen and ammonium chlorate are formed.
    8 NH3 + 3 Cl2 → 6 NH4Cl + N2
  2. NH3 reacts with excess of Cl2 to form NCl3 and HCl.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 13

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 5.
Write the names and formulae of the oxoacids of chlorine. Explain their structures and relative acidic nature.
Answer:
Four oxyacids of chlorine are known. They are
Hypochlorous acid – HOCl
Chlorous acid – HClO2
Chloric acid – HClO3
Perchloric acid – HClO4
Structure of HClO : In this chlorine atom is sp3 hybridised. Outer electronic configuration of Cl in ClO after sp3 hybridisation.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 14
Shape is tetrahedral with 3 lone pairs (or) linear.
No π – bonds.

Chlorous acid : (HClO2) : Chlorine is in sp3 hybrid state, in first excited state. Shape is tetrahedral with 2 lone pairs (or) angular one πd-p bond is present.
First excited state
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 17

Chloric acid (HClO3) : The central chlorine atom undergoes sp3 hybridisation in second excited state.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 15
Shape is tetrahedral with one lone pair (or) pyramidal.
Two πd-p bonds present.

Perchloric acid (HClO4) : The central chlorine atom undergoes sp3 hybridisation in third excited state.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 16
Shape is perfect tetrahedral. No lone pairs.
Three πd-p bonds present.

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Halogens have maximum negative electron gain enthalpy in the respective periods of the periodic table. Why ?
Solution:
Halogens have the smallest size in their respective periods and therefore high effective nuclear charge. As a consequence, they readily accept one electron to acquire noble gas electronic configuration.

Question 2.
Although electron gain enthalpy of fluorine is less negative as compared to chlorine, fluorine is a stronger oxidising agent than chlorine. Why ?
Solution:
It is due to

  1. Low enthalpy of dissociation of F-F bond
  2. High hydration enthalpy of F

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 3.
Fluorine exhibits only – 1 oxidation state whereas other halogens exhibit +1, +3, +5 and +7 oxidation states also. Explain.
Solution:
Fluorine is the most electronegative element and cannot exhibit any positive oxidation .state. Other halogens have d orbitals and therefore, can expand their octets and show +1, +3, +5 and +7 oxidation states also.

Question 4.
Write the balanced chemical equation for the reaction of Cl2 with hot and concentrated NaOH. Is this reaction a disproportionation reaction ? Justify.
Solution:
3 Cl2 + 6 NaOH → 5NaCl + NaClO3 + 3H2O
Yes. Chlorine from zero oxidation state is changed to -1 and +5 oxidation states.

Question 5.
When HCl reacts with finely powdered iron, it forms ferrous chloride and not ferric chloride. Why ?
Solution:
Its reaction with iron produces H2.
Fe + 2HCl → FeC2 + H2
Liberation of hydrogen prevents the formation of ferric chloride.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 6.
Discuss the molecular shape of BrF3 on the basis of VSEPR theory.
Solution:
The central atom Br has seven electrons in the valence shell. Three of these will form electron pair bonds with three fluorine atoms leaving behind four electrons. Thus, there are three bond pairs and two lone pairs.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 18
According to VSEPR theory, these will occupy the comers of a trigonal bipyramid. The two lone pairs will occupy the equatorial positions to minimise lone pair- lone pair and the bond pair-lone pair repulsions which are greater than the bond pair-bond pair repulsions. In addition, the axial flourine atoms will be bent towards the equatorial fluorine in order to minimise the lone pair-lone pair repulsions. The shape would be that of a slightly bent T.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Considering the parameters such as bond dissociation enthalpy, electron gain enthalpy and hydration enthalpy, compare the oxidising power of F2 and Cl2.
Oxidizing power is a combined effect of bond dissociation enthalpy, electron gain enthalpy and hydration enthalpy.
Solution:
Comparing F2 and Cl2 with the given parameters.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 19
From the data given above, it is clear that the bond dissociation enthalpy and electron gain enthalpy are higher for chlorine but hydration energy is much higher for fluorine. It compensates the effect of other two and thus, makes flourine more oxidizing than chlorine.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 20
The relative oxidizing power of the halogens can be further illustrated by their reactions with water.
2 F2(g) + 2 H2O(l) → 4H+ (aq) + 4F (aq) + O2(g) ……………. (i)
Cl2(g) + H2O(l) → HCl (aq) + HOCl (aq) ……………… (ii)

Question 2.
Give two examples to show the anomalous behaviour of fluorine.
Solution:
The two anomalous behaviour of flourine are as follows :
a) It forms only one oxo-acid while other halogens form a number of oxo-acids.
b) Hydrogen flouride (HF) is a liquid (b.p. 293 K) due to strong hydrogen bonding whereas other hydrogen halides are gases.

Question 3.
Sea is the greatest source of some halogens. Comment.
Solution:
Sea water contains chlorides, bromides and iodides of sodium, potassium, magnesium and calcium. NaCl is the most abundant (2.5% by mass) among all of these. Certain forms of marine life contain iodine in their systems; Various sea weeds, for example, contain upto . 0.5% of iodine and chile saltpetre contains upto 0.2% of sodium iodate. NaCl and camalite, KCl, MgCl2. 6H2O etc are present in the deposits of dried up seas.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 4.
Give the reason for bleaching action of Cl2 ?
Solution:
Bleaching action of chlorine is due to its oxidizing property. When chlorine reacts with water, it gives nascent oxygen which decoloures is the coloured substance.
Cl2 + H2O → 2HCl + [O]
Coloured substance + [O] → Colourless substance
Bleaching action of chlorine creates permanent effect. It bleaches the vegetable or organic matter in the presence of moisture.

Question 5.
Name some poisonous gases which can be prepared from chlorine gas.
Solution:

  1. Phosgene (COCl2)
  2. Tear gas (CCl3NO2)
  3. Mustard gas (ClCH2CH2SCH2CH2Cl)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(b) Group-16 Elements Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Why is dioxygen a gas but sulphur a solid?
Answer:
Dioxygen is a gas but sulphur a solid.
Explanation:

  • Due to small atomic size and high electronegativity oxygen forms Pπ – Pπ multiple bond and exists as O2 molecules held together by weak vander waal’s forces. Thus oxygen exists as a gas at room temperature.
  • Due to large atomic size and less electronegativity sulphur forms strong S—S single bonds and exists as S8 molecules with puckered ring structure. Hence sulphur is a solid at room temperature.

Question 2.
What happens when
a) KClO3 is heated with MnO2
b) O3 is passed through KI soultion
Answer:
a) When KClO3 is heated with Mn02 and liberates oxygen gas.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 1
b) O3 is passed through KI solution I2 is liberated
2KI + O3 + H2O → 2KOH + I2 + 2O2

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 3.
Give two examples each for amphoteric oxides and neutral oxides.
Answer:

  • Examples of amphoterc oxides – Al2O3, SiO2, PbO.
  • Examples of neutral oxides – CO, NO and N2O.

Question 4.
Oxygen generally exhibits an oxidation state of -2 only while the other members of the group show oxidation states of +2, +4 and +6 also – explain.
Answer:

  • Oxygen exhibits -2 oxidation state due to its high electronegativity. The tendency of exhibiting -2 oxidation state decrease down the group.
  • Due to decrease of electronegativity down the group the other elements exhibit +2, +4 and +6 oxidation states also.

Question 5.
Write any two compounds, in which oxygen shows an oxidation state different from -2. Give the oxidation states of oxygen in them.
Answer:
OF2 and O2 F2 are two compounds in which oxygen shows an oxidation state different from-2.

  • In OF2 the oxidation state of oxygen is +2
  • In O2F2 the oxidation state of oxygen is +1.

Question 6.
Oxygen molecule has the formula O2 while sulphur has S8 – explain.
Answer:
Due to small atomic size and high electronegativity oxygen forms Pπ – Pπ multiple bond and exists as O2 molecule.
Due to large atomic size and less electronegativity sulphur forms strong S – S single bonds and exists S8 molecule.

Question 7.
Why is H2O a liquid while H2S is a gas ?
Answer:
H2O is liquid due to the presence of intermolecular hydrogen bonding. While H2S is gas because it is not having such type of bonding.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 8.
H2O is neutral while H2S is acidic – explain.
Answer:
H2O is neutral while H2S is acidic.
Reason: The O-H bond dissociation Enthalpy is greater than the S – H bond dissociation Enthalpy.

Question 9.
Name the most abundant element present in earth’s crust.
Answer:
The most abundant element present in earth’s crust is oxygen (about 46.6%).

Question 10.
Which element of group-16 shows highest catenation ?
Answer:
Sulphus shows highest catenation among group – 16 elements and exists as S9 molecule with puckered ring structure.

Question 11.
Among the hydrides of chalcogens, which is most acidic and which is most stable ?
Answer:

  • Among hydrides of chalcogens, H2Te is most acidic.
  • Among hydrides of chalcogens, H2O is most stable.

Question 12.
Give the hybridization of sulphur in the following.
a) SO2
b) SO3
c) SF4
d)SF6
Answer:
a) Hybridisation of’S’ in SO2 is Sp2
b) Hybridisation of ‘S’ in SO3 is Sp2
c) Hybridisation of ‘S’ in SF4 is Sp3d
d) Hybridisation of ‘S’ in SF6 is Sp3d2

Question 13.
Write the names and formulae of any two oxyacids of sulphur. Indicate the oxidation state of sulphur in them.
Answer:

  • Peroxy mono sulphuric acid – H2SO5 ‘S’ oxidation state +6 .
  • Peroxy di sulphuric acid – H2S2O8 ‘S’ oxidation state +6

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 14.
Explain the structures of SF4 and SF6.
Answer:
Structure of SF4:

  • It SF4 ‘S’ undergoes sp3d hybndisation.
  • It has trigonal bipyramidal structure in which one of the equitorial positions is occupied by a lone pair of electrons. This geometry is also known as see – saw geometry.

Structure of SF6:

  • In SF6 ‘S’ undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation.
  • It has octahedral structure.

Question 15.
Give one example each for
a) a neutral oxide
b) a peroxide
c) a super oxide
Answer:
a) CO, N2O are neutral oxides.
b) Na2O2, BaO2 are pernxides.
c) KO2, RbO2 are super oxides.

Question 16.
What is tailing of mercury? How is it removed? [A.P. & T.S. (Mar. 15)]
Answer:
Mercury loses it’s lustreness, meniscus and consequently sticks to the walls of glass vessel when it reacts with ozone. This phenomenon is called tailing of mercury.
2Hg + O3 → Hg2O + O2
It is removed by shaking it with water which dissolves Hg2O.

Question 17.
Write the principle involved in the quantitative estimation of ozone gas.
Answer:
When ozone reacts with an excess of Kl solution buffered with a borate buffer (pH 9.2) iodine is liberated which can be titrated against a standard solution of sodium thiosulphate. In this way O3 is estimated quantitatively.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 18.
Write the structure of ozone.
Answer:
Structure of Ozone:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 2

  • O3 is angular molecule with bond angle 117°
  • O – O bond length is 128 pm.

Question 19.
SO2 can be used as an anti-chior. Explain.
Answer:
SO2 gas is used as anti-chlor. Anti-chior means the substance which removes the excess of on clothes. SO2 reacts with chlorine in presence of charcoal to give suiphuryl chloride
SO2(g) + Cl2(g) → SO2Cl2l

Question 20.
How is ozone detected ?
Answer:
Ozone is a pale blue gas, dark blue liquid and violet black solid and it has characterstic smell.

  • It is detected by the reaction with ‘Hg’ which is called as tailing of mercury.
    2Hg + O3 → Hg2O + O2
  • Ozone turns benzidene paper to brown colour.

Question 21.
How does ozone react with Ethylene ?
Answer:
Ethylene reacts with ozone to form Ethylene ozonoid followed by the hydrolysis to form formaldehyde.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 3

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 22.
Out of O2 and O3, which is paramagnetic ?
Answer:

  • O2 is paramagnetic due to presence of unpaired electrons
  • O3 (gaseous) is diamagnetic due to absence of unpaired electrons.

Question 23.
Between O3 and O2, ozone is a better oxidizing agent – why ?
Answer:
Ozone is next to fluorine in the oxidising capacity. It is best oxidising agent than O2. (Fluorine is the powerful oxidising agent). Ozone liberates nascent oxygen easily.

Question 24.
Write any two uses each for O3 and H2SO4.
Answer:
Uses of O3:

  • Ozone is used in sterilisation of water.
  • Ozone is used in manufacture of artificial silk and camphor etc.
  • Ozone is used to identify unsaturation in carbon compounds.

Uses of H2SO4:

  • H2SO4 is used in the manufacture of fertilisers.
  • H2SO4 is used in petrol refining.
  • H2SO4 is used in detergent industry.

Question 25.
Which form of sulphur shows paramagnetism ?
Answer:
In vapour state sulphur partly exists as S2 molecule which has two unpaired electrons in the antibonding π (π*)orbitals like O2. Hence exhibits paramagnetism.

Question 26.
How is the presence of SO2 detected ?
Answer:
SO2 has a pungent odour SO2 presence can be detected by the following tests.

  1. SO2 changes the colour of acidified potassium dichromate solution from orange to green.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 4
  2. SO2 decolourises acidified KMnO4 solution.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 5

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 27.
Why are group – 16 elements called chalcogens ?
Answer:
Chalcogens means mineral forming (or) ore forming elements. Most of elements exist in earth crust as oxides, sulphides, selinides, telurids etc. So Group – 16 elements are called as chalcogens.

Question 28.
Among chalcogens, which has highest eletronegativity and which has highest electron gain enthalpy?
Answer:

  • Among chalcogens Oxygen has high electronegativity.
  • Among chalcogens Sulphur has high electron gain Enthalpy.

Question 29.
Which hydride of group – 16 has highest boiling point and weakest acidic character ?
Answ:

  • Among group – 16 hydrides water (H2O) has high bioling point.
  • Among group – 16 hydrides water (H2O) has weakest acidic, character.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Justify the placement of O, S, Se, Te and Po in the same group of the periodic table in terms of electronic configuration, oxidation states and hydride formation.
Answer:
1) Electronic configurations :
Oxygen (O) – [He] 2s2 2p2
Sulphur (S) – [Ne] 3s2 3p2
Selenium (Se) – [Ar] 3d10 4s24p4
Tellurium (Te) – [Kr] 4d10 5s2 sp4
Polonium (Po) – [Xe] 4f14 5d10 6s2 6p4
All the above elements has general outer electronic configuration ns2np4.

2) Oxidation states :
All the gives elements (chalcogens) exhibits common oxidation state of-2
O-2, S-2, Se-2 etc.

3) Hydride formation:
All these elements (chalcogens) forms hydrides of type EH2(E = chalcogen)
Eg : H2O, H2S, H2Se, H2Te, H2Po.
The above mentioned concepts evident that the elements O, S, Se, Te and Po are present in the same group of periodic table.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 2.
Describe the manufacture of H2SO4 by contact process.
Answer:
Manufacture of H2SO4 by contact process:
Manufacturing of H2SO4 involves three main steps.
Step – 1.
SO2 production : The required SO2 for this process is obtained by burning S(or) Iron pyrites in oxygen.
S + O2 → SO2
4FeS2 + 15O2 → 2Fe2O3 + 8SO3
Step – 2
SO3 formation: SO2 is oxidised in presence of catalyst with atmosphric air to form SO3
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 6
Step – 3
Formation of H2SO4: SO3 formed in the above step absorbed in 98% H2SO4 to get oleum (H2S2O7). This oleum is diluted to get desired concentration of H2SO4.
SO3 + H2SO4 → H2S2O7
H2S2O7 + H2O → 2H2SO4

Question 3.
How is ozone prepared ? How does it react with the following? [Mar. 14]
a) PbS
b) KI
c) Hg
d) Ag
Answer:
Preparation of Ozone:
A slow dry stream of oxygen under silent electric discharge to form ozone (about 10%). The product obtained is known as ozonised oxygen.
3O2 → 2O3 ∆ H° = 142kJ/mole

  • The formation of ozone is an endothermic reaction.
  • It is necessary to use silent electric discharge in the preparation of O3 to prevent its decomposition

a) Reaction with PbS : Black lead suiphide oxidised to white lead sulphate in presence of ozone.
PbS + 4O3 → PbSO4 + 4O2

b) Reaction with KI: Moist Kl is oxidised to Iodine in presence of ozone.
2KI + H2O + O3 -→ 2KOH + I2 + O2

c) Reaction with Hg : Mercury loses it’s lustreness, meniscus and consequently sticks to the walls of glass vessel when it reacts with ozone. This phenomenon is called tailing of mercury.
2Hg + O3 → Hg2 O + O2
It is removed by shaking it with water which dissolves Hg2O.

d) Reaction with Ag : Ag metal oxidised to Ag2O (Ag metal is tarnished):
2Ag + O3 → Ag2O + O2

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 4.
Write a short note on the allotropy of sulphur.
Answer:
The important allotropes of sulphur are
a) yellow rhombic (α. sulphur)
b) Monoclinic (β – sulphur)

  • The stable from is α-sulphur (at room temperature)

Rhombic sulphur (α – Sulphur):

  • Colour : Yellow. ,
  • Melting point: 385.8K.
  • Specific gravity : 2.06.
  • It is insouble in water and partially soluble in alcohol, benzene etc. and readily soluble in CS2.

Monoclinic sulphur (β – Sulphur):

  • Melting point: 392K
  • Specific gravity : 1.98.
  • It is soluble in CS2.
  • Rhombic sulphur transforms to monoclinic sulphur by heating above 369K. This temperature is called transition temperature.

Question 5.
How does SO2 react with the following ?
a) Na2SO3(aq)
b) Cl2
c) Fe+3 ions
d) KMnO4
Answer:
a) Sodium sulphite (aq) reacts with So2 to form sodium hydrogen sulphite.
Na2SO3 + H2O + SO2 → 2NaHSO3

b) SO2 as reacts with chlorine gas in the presence of charcoal to form sulphuryl chloride.
SO2(g) + Cl2(g) → SO2Cl2(l)

c) Fe+3 ions are reduced to Fe+2 ions by SO2.
2Fe+3 + SO2 + 2H2O → 2Fe+2 + SO-24 + 4H+

d) SO2 gas decolourises acidified potassium permanganate (VII) solution.
5SO2 + 2MnO4 + 2H2O → 5SO-24 + 4H++ 2Mn+2

Question 6.
Starting from elemental sulphur, how is H2SO4 prepared ?
Answer:
Manufacture of H2SO4 by contact process :
Manufacturing of H2SO4 involves three main steps.
Step – 1.
SO2 production : The required SO2 for this process is obtained by burning S(or) Iron pyrites in oxygen.
S + O2 → SO2
4FeS2 + 15O2 → 2Fe2O3 + 8SO3
Step – 2
SO3 formation: SO2 is oxidised in presence of catalyst with atmosphric air to form SO3
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 6
Step – 3
Formation of H2SO4: SO3 formed in the above step absorbed in 98% H2SO4 to get oleum (H2S2O7). This oleum is diluted to get desired concentration of H2SO4.
SO3 + H2SO4 → H2S2O7
H2S2O7 + H2O → 2H2SO4

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 7.
Describe the structures (shapes) of SO-24 and SO3.
Answer:
Structure of SO3:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 7

  • In SO3 sulphur undergoes sp2 hybridisation.
  • Shape : Trigonal planait s
  • Bondangle: 120°.
  • S -0 bond length: 143 pm.

Structure of SO-24:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 8

  • In SO-24 sulphur undergo sp3 hybridisation.
  • Shape : Tetrahedral.
  • It has several resonance structures.
  • In this two Pπ – dπ bonds are present.

Question 8.
Which oxide of sulphur can act as both oxidizing and reducing agent? Give one example each.
Answer:
Sulphur dioxide (SO2) acts as both oxidising as well as reducing agent.
SO2 as Oxidising agent:
Sodium suiphide oxidises to hypo with SO2.
2Na2S + 3SO2 → 2Na2S2O2 + S
SO2 as Reducing agent:
SO2 reduces Fe+3 ions to Fe+2 ions.
2Fe+3 + SO2 + 2H2O → 2Fe+2 + SO-24 + 4H+

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 9.
Explain the conditions favourable for the formation of SO3 from SO2 in the contact process of H2SO4.
Answer:
Le Chatlier’s principle – Application to produce SO3:
The oxidation of SO2 to SO3 in the presence of a catalyst is a reversible reaction. The thermochemical equation for the conversion is written as
2SO2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2SO3(g); ∆H = -196 kJ
The equation reveals the following points :

  1. 3 volumes of the reactants convert into 2 volumes of SO3. i.e., a decrease of volume accompanies the reaction.
  2. the reaction is an exothermic change.
  3. the catalyst may be present to increase the SO3 yields.

According to Le Chatlier’s principle,
i) a decrease in volume of the system is favoured at high pressures. But in practice only about 2 bar pressure is used. The reason for not using high pressures is acid resisting towers which can withstand high pressures cannot be built.

ii) exothermic changes are favoured at low temperatures. It is not always convenient in the industry to work at low temperatures. In such situations an optimum temperature is maintained. At this temperature considerable amounts of the product are obtained. In the manufactrue of H2SO4, the optimum temperature suitable for the conversion of SO2 into SO3 is experimentally found to be 720K.

iii) The rate of formation of SO3 is enhanced by the use of a catalyst. (V2 O5 (or) Pt – asbestos).
Favourable Conditions :
Temperature : 720K
Pressure : 2 bar
Catalyst: V2O5 (or) platinized asbestos.

Question 10.
Complete the following
a) KCl + H2SO4 (Conc) →
b) Sucrose AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 9
c) Cu + H2SO4 (Conc) →
d) C + H2SO4 (Cone) →
Answer:
a) 2KCl + Cone. H2SO4 → 2HCl + K2SO4
b) C12H22O11 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 9 12C + nH2O
c) Cu + 2H2SO4(Conc) → CuS04 + SO2 + 2H2O
d) C + 2H2SO4(Conc) → CO2 + 2SO2 + 2H2O

Question 11.
Which is used for drying ammonia ?
Answer:
For drying ammonia quick line (CaO) is used.
For drying ammonia cone. H2SO4, P4O10 and anhydrous CaCl2 cannot be used because they react with ammonia and forms (NH4)2SO4, (NH4)3PO4 and CaCl2. 8NH3
H2SO4 + 2NH3 → (NH4)2 SO4
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 10
CaCl2 + 8NH3 → CaCl38NH3.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 12.
Why cone H2SO4, P4O10 and anhydrous CaCl2 cannot be used to dry ammonia ?
(Hint: ammonia reacts with them forming (NH4)2 SO4; (NH4)3 PO4 and CaCl2, 8NH2)
Answer:
For drying ammonia quick line (CaO) is used.
For drying ammonia cone. H2SO4, P4O10 and anhydrous CaCl2 cannot be used because they react with ammonia and forms (NH4)2SO4, (NH4)3PO4 and CaCl2. 8NH3
H2SO4 + 2NH3 → (NH4)2 SO4
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 10
CaCl2 + 8NH3 → CaCl38NH3.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain in detail the manufacture of sulphuric acid by contact process. [T.S. Mar. 18, 16]
Answer:
Manufacture of H2SO4 by contact process :
Manufacturing of H2SO4 involves three main steps.
Step – 1.
SO2 production : The required SO2 for this process is obtained by burning S(or) Iron pyrites in oxygen.
S + O2 → SO2
4FeS2 + 15O2 → 2Fe2O3 + 8SO3
Step – 2
SO3 formation: SO2 is oxidised in presence of catalyst with atmosphric air to form SO3

Le Chatlier’s principle – Application to produce SO3 :
The oxidation of SO2 to SO3 in the presence of a catalyst is a reversible reaction. The thermochemical equation for the conversion is written as
2SO2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2SO3(g); ∆H = -196 kJ
The equation reveals the following points : .

  1. 3 volumes of the reactants convert into 2 volumes of SO3. i.e., a decrease of volume accompanies the reaction.
  2. the reaction is an exothermic change.
  3. the catalyst may be present to increase the SO3 yields.

According to Le Chatlier’s principle, .
i) a decrease in volume of the system is favoured at high pressures. But in practice only about 2 bar pressure is used. The reason for not using high pressures is acid resisting towers which can withstand high pressures cannot be built.

ii) exothermic changes are favoured at low temperatures. It is not always convenient in the industry to work at low temperatures. In such situations an optimum temperature is maintained. At this temperature considerable amounts of the product are obtained. In the manufactrue of H2SO4, the optimum temperature suitable for the conversion of SO2 into SO., is experimentally found to be 720K.

iii) The rate of formation of SO3 is enhanced by the use of a catalyst. (V2 O5 (or) Pt – asbestos).
Favourable Conditions :
Temperature : 720K .
Pressure : 2 bar
Catalyst: V2O5 (or) platinized asbestos.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 11
Step – 3 :
Formation of H2SO4: SO3 formed in the above step absorbed in 98% H2SO4 to get oleum (H2S2O7). This oleum is diluted to get desired concentration of H2SO4.
SO3 + H2SO4 → H2S2O7
H2S2O7 + H2O → 2H2SO4

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 2.
How is ozone prepared from oxygen ? Explain its reaction with [A.P. Mar. 19, 18, 17, 16] [Mar. 14]
a) C2H4
b) KI
c) Hg
d) PbS.
Answer:
Preparation of Ozone :
A slow dry stream of oxygen under silent electric discharge to form ozone (about 10%). The product obtained is known as ozonised oxygen.
3O2 → 2O3; ∆H° = 142kJ/mole

  • The formation of ozone is an endothermic reaction.
  • It is necessary to use silent electric discharge in the preparation of O3 to prevent its decomposition

a) Reaction with C2H3 : Ethylene reacts with ozone to form Ethylene ozonoid followed by the hydrolysis to form formaldehyde.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 12

) Reaction with KI: moist KI is oxidised to Iodine in presence of ozone.
2KI + H2O + O3 → 2KOH + I2 + O2

c) Reaction with Hg : Mercury loses it’s lustreness, meniscus and consequently sticks to the walls of glass vessel when it reacts with ozone. This phenomenon is called tailing of mercury.
2Hg + O3 → Hg2O + O2
It is removed by shaking it with water which dissolves Hg2O.

d) Reaction with PbS : Black lead sulphide oxidised to white lead sulphate in presence of ozone.
PbS + 4O3 → PbSO4 + 4O2.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
List the important sources of sulphur.
Answer:
Occurrence or sources of sulphur in the earth’s crust, percentage of sulphur is only 0.03 to 0. 1%. In combined state, it occurs

  1. In the form of sulphates, eg., gypsum (CaSO4 . 2H2O). epsom salt (MgSO4 . 7H2O), baryte
    (BaSO4).
  2. In the form of sulphides, eg., galena (PbS), zinc blende (ZnS), Copper pyrites (CuFeS2). In volcanoes, traces of sulphur occur as H2S. In organic materials such as eggs, proteins, garlic, onion,mustard, hair and wool, sulphur is present in trace amounts.

Question 2.
Write the order of thermal stability of the hydrides of group 16 elements.
Answer:
The thermal stability of hydrides of group 16 elements is directly proportional to the bond dissociation enthalpy of H – E bond. On moving down the group, bond dissociation energy decreases because bond length increases.
Thus, the order of bond dissociation energy is
H2O > H2S > H2Se > H2Te > H2Po
This is also the order of thermal stability.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 3.
Why is H2O a liquid and H2S a gas ?
Answer:
The difference in electronegativity values of 0(3.5) and H(2.1) is more than the difference between the electronegativity values of H(2.1) and S(2.5) i.e., O – H bond is more polar than S – H bond. That is why H-bonding is present among water molecules but absent in H2S. Thus,
strong intermolecular interactions causes water to exist as a liquid but due to weak van der waals’ force H2S exists as a gas.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 13

Question 4.
Which of the following does not react with oxygen directly ? Zn, Ti, Pt, Fe.
Answer:
Platinum (Pt).

Question 5.
Complete the following reactions.
i) C2H4 + O2
ii) 4Al + 3O2
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 14

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 6.
Why does O3 act as a powerful oxidising agent ?
Answer:
Because ozone liberates nascent oxygen very easily.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 15

Question 7.
How is Oa estimated quantitatively ?
Answer:
When ozone reacts with an excess of potassium iodide solution buffered with a borate buffer (pH 9.2), iodine is liberated which can be titrated against a standard solution of sodium thiosulphate. In this way O3 can be estimated quantitatively.

Question 8.
What happens when sulphur dioxide is passed through an aqueous solution of Fe (III) salt ?
Answer:
When SO2 is passed through an aqueous solution of Fe (III), i.e., ferric salt, it is reduced to Fe (II) i,e., ferrous salt. Here, SO2 acts as a reducing agent.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 16

Question 9.
Comment on the nature of two S – O bonds formed in SO2 molecule. Are the two S – O bonds in this molecule equal ?
Answer:
The two S – O bonds in SO2 molecule are covalent in nature. These are equal with bond length = 143 pm. The resonating structures of SO2 are as follows.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 17
SO2 is a resonance hybrid of these two canonical forms.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 10.
How is the presence of SO2 detected ?
Answer:
SO2 has a pungent odour. Two tests to detect the presence of SO2 are as follows :

  1. SO2 decolourises acidified KMnO4 solution.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 18
  2. SO2 Changes the colour of acidified potassium dichromate solution from orange to green.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 19

Question 11.
Mention three areas in which H2S04 plays an important role.
Answer:
Uses of sulphuric acid.

  1. It is used in the manufacture of pigments, paints and dyestuff intermediate.
  2. It is used in petroleum refining.
  3. It is also used in fertilizer industry.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 12.
Write the conditions to maximize the yield of H2SO4 by contact process.
Answer:
The key step in the manufacture of H2SO4 is catalytic oxidation of SO2 to produce SO3 in presence of V2O5.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 20
The reaction is exothermic, reversible and the forward reaction results in the decrease in volume. Thus according to Le-Chatelier’s principle, the forward reaction should be favoured by low temperature and high pressure. But the temperature should not be very low otherwise the. rate of reaction will become very slow.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(a) Group-15 Elements Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Why does the reactivity of nitrogen differ from phosphorus?
Answer:
Nitrogen gas exists as a diatomic molecule. Due to the presence of a triple bond between Base N – Atoms bond dissociation energy is high (941.4 KJ /mol). Hence nitrogen is inert and unreactive.
Phosphorus is a tetra atomic molecule and the P-P single bond is weaker than N ≡ N. P – P bond dissociation energy is 213 KJ/mole. Hence phosphorus is more reactive than Nitrogen.

Question 2.
How is nitrogen prepared in the laboratory?
Write the chemical equations of the reactions involved.
Answer:
Preparation of di Nitrogen :

  • Very pure nitrogen is obtained by the thermal decomposition of sodium (or) barium a-zide.
    Ba(N3)2 → Ba + 3N2
  • In the laboratory dinitrogen is prepared by treating an aqueous solution of NH4Cl with NaNO2
    NH4Cl(aq) + NaNO2(aq) → N2(g) + 2H2O(I) + NaCl(aq)
  • Nitrogen can also be obtained by the thermal decompostion of ammonium dichromate.
    (NH4)3 Cr2O7 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 1 N2 + 4H2O + Cr2O3

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 3.
Nitrogen exists as diatomic molecule and phosphorus as P4 – Why ?
Answer:
Nitrogen exists as diatomic molecule :

  • Nitrogen has small size and high electronegativity and nitrogen atom forms Pπ – Pπ multiple bonds with it self (triple bond). So it exists as a discrete diatomic molecule in elementary state.

Phosphorus exists as tetra atomic molecule :

  • Phosphorus has large size and less electronegative and it forms P-P single bonds. So it exists as tetra atomic i.e., P4.

Question 4.
Why does nitrogen show catenation properties less than phosphorus ?
Answer:
Explanation :
The single N-N bond is weaker than the single P-P bond due to high inter electronic repulsion of the non-boriding electrons in N2 because of small bond length. Therefore the catenation property is weaker in nitrogen as compared to phosphorus.

Question 5.
Nitrogen molecule is highly stable – Why ?
Answer:
Nitrogen Molecule is more stable because in between two nitrogen atoms of N2, a triple bond is present. To break this triple bond high energy is required (941.4KJ/mole).

Question 6.
Why are the compounds of bismuth more stable in +3 oxidation state ?
Answer:
Bismuth compounds are more stable in +3 oxidation state because ‘Bi’ exhibits +3 stable oxidation state instead of +5 due to inert pair effect.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 7.
What is allotropy ? Explain the different allotropic forms of phosphorus.
Answer:
Allotropy: The existance of an element in different physical forms having similar chemical properties is called allotropy.
Allotropes of ‘P’: → White ‘P’ (or) Yellow ‘P’.

  • Red ‘P’
  • Scarlet ‘P’
  • Violet ‘P’
  • α – black ‘P’
  • β – black ‘P’.

White phosphorus :

  • It is poisonous and insoluble in water and soluble in carbon disulphide and glows in dark. It is a translucent white waxy solid. ‘
  •  It dissolves in boiling NaOH solution and gives PH3.
    P4 + 3NaOH + 3H2 → PH3 + 3NaH2PO2. (sodium hypo phosphite)
  •  It is more reactive than other solid phases.
  • Bond angle is 60° and it readily catches fire.

Red phosphorus :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 2

  • Red ‘F possesses iron grey lustre.
  • In is odour less, non poisonous and insoluble in water as well as CS2.
  • Red F’ is much less reactive than white ‘P’.
    Black ‘P’:
  • α – Black ‘P’: It is formed when red ‘P’ is heated in a sealed tube 803K.
  • β – Black F : It is prepared by heating white P’ at 473 K under high pressure.

Question 8.
How do you account for the inert character of dinitrogen ?
Answer:
Di Nitrogen is chemically inert. .
Explanation : In nitrogen molecule there exists a triple bond between two nitrogen atoms. To break this triple bond high energy (bond dissociation energy) is required (941.4 KJ/mole).

Question 9.
Explain the difference in the structures of white and red phosphorus.
Answer:
White ‘P’ molecule has tetrahedral structure (discrete molecule). Discrete ‘P’ molecules are held by vander waal’s forces
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 3
White phosphorus
Red ‘P’ is polymeric consisting of chains of P4 tetrahedron linked together through covalent bonds.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 4

Question 10.
How is α – black phosphorus prepared from red phosphorus?
Answer:
α – Black ‘P: It is formed when red? is heated in a sealed tube 803K.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 11.
Write the difference between the properties of white phosphorus and red phosphorus.
Answer:
White ‘P’

  • It is white waxy solid (translucent).
  • It is insolable in water and solable in CS2.
  • It is more reactive.
  • It is poisonous.

Red ‘P’

  • It possesses iron grey lustre.
  • It is in soluble in CS2 as cool water.
  • It is more reactive than white ‘P’.
  •  It is non – poisonous.

Question 12.
What is inert pair effect ?
Answer:
Inert pair effect: The reluctance of ns pair of electrons to take part in bond formation is called inert pair effect.
Bi exhibits +3 oxidation state instead of +5 due to inert pair effect.

Question 13.
Explain why is NH3 basic while BiH3 is only feebly basic.
Answer:
NH3 is basic while BiH3 is only feebly basic.

Explanation :
Due to small atomic size of nitrogen, the electron density on nitrogen atom is greater than that on Bi atom. So electron releasing tendency is greater in NH3.
Hence NH3 is basic and BiH3 is feebly basic.

Question 14.
Arrange the hydrides of group – 15 elements in the increasing order of basic strength and decreasing order of reducing character.
Answer:

  1. Increasing order of basic strength of Group – 15 elements hydrides is
    BiH3 < SbH3 < ASH3 < PH3 < NH3.
  2. Decreasing order of reducing character of Group – 15 elements hydrides is
    BiH3 > SbH3 > ASH3 > PH3 > NH3.

Question 15.
PH3 is a weaker base than NH3 – Explain.
Answer:
PH3 is a weaker base than NH3.

  • In NH3 nitrogen atom undergoes SP3 hybridisation and due to small size it has high electron density than in ‘P’ of PH3.
  • Due to large size of ‘P’ atom and availability of large surface area, lonepair of electron spread in PH3. Hence PH3 is weaker base then NH3.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 16.
A hydride of group -15 elements dissolves in water to form a basic solution. This solution dissolves the AgCl precipitate. Name the hydride. Write the chemical equations involved.
Answer:
Given a hydride of group – 15 elements dissolves in water to form a basic solution;This solution dissolves the Agcl precipitate.

The given hydride is ammonia. It forms basic solution when dissolved in water due to formation of OH ions.
NH3(g) + HxOl ⇌ \(\mathrm{NH}_4^{+}(\mathrm{aq})\) + OH(aq)
This solution dissolves AgCl. Ppt due to formation of complex compound.
AgCl(s) (white Ppt) + 2NH3(aq) → [Ag(NH3)2]Cl(aq) (colourless)

Question 17.
What happens when white phosphorus is heated with cone. NaOH solution in an inert atmosphere of CO2? [A.P. Mar. 19, 15]
Answer:
When white phosphorus heated with con. NaOH solution in an inert atomosphere of CO2 forms PH3.
P4 + 3NaOH + 3H2O → PH3 + 3NaH2PO2.

Question 18.
NH3 forms hydrogen bonds but PH3 does not – Why ?
Answer:
NH3 forms hydrogen bonds but PH3 does not.
Reason : Ammonia forms hydrogen bonds because it it a polar molecule and N-H bond is highly polar. Nitrogen has more electronegativity than phosphrous. In case of PH3 P-H bond polarity decreases.

Question 19.
The HNH angle is higher than HPH, HAsH and HSbH angles – Why?
Answer:
The central atom ε (where, ε = N, P, As, Sb, Bi) in all given hydrides is Sp3 hybridized. However, its electronegativity decreases and atomic size increase on moving down the group. Therefore is a gradual decrease in the force of repulsion between the shared electron pairs around the central atom. Thus, bond angle decreases as we move down the group.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 5

Question 20.
How do calcium phosphide and heavy water react?
Answer:
Calcium phosphide reacts with heavy water to form Deutero phosphine.
Ca3P2 + 6D2O → 3 Ca (OD)2 + 2PD3

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 21.
Ammonia is a good complexing agent – Explain with an example. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
NH3 is a lewis base and it donates electron pair to form dative bond with metal ions. This results in the formation of complex compound.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 6

Question 22.
A mixture of Ca3P2 and CaC2 is used in making Holme’s signal – Explain. [A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
A Mixture of Ca3P2 and CaC2 is used in Holme’s signal.This Mixture containing containers are pierced and thrown in the sea, when the gas is evolved bum and serve as a signal.
The spontaneous combustion of PH3 is the technical use of Holme’s signal.

Question 23.
Which chemical compound is formed in the brown ring test of nitrate ions ?
Answer:
In the brown ring test of nitrate salts a brown ring is formed. It’s formula is [Fe(H2O)5N0]+2.

Question 24.
Give the resonating structures of NO2 and N2O5.
Answer:
Resonance structure of NO2:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 7
Resonance structure of N2O5
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 8

Question 25.
Why does R3P = O exist but R3N = O does not (R = alkyl group) ?
Answer:
R3P = O exist but R3N = O does not.
Explanation :
Nitrogen does not form dπ – Pπ multiple bond with oxygen because of lack of d – orbitals in Nitrogen atom. But in case of R3N = O the value of nitrogen should be 5. So these compounds do not exist where as in case of ‘P’ atom d-orbitals are available. So P-atom can able to form dπ – Pπ multiple bonds hence R3P = O exist.

Question 26.
How is nitric oxide (NO) prepared ?
Answer:
The catalytic oxidation of NH3 by atmospheric oxygen gives nitric oxide.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 9

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 27.
Give one example each of normal oxide and mixed oxide of nitrogen.
Answer:

  • Nitric oxide (NO) is an example of normal oxide of Nitrogen.
  • Dinitrogen trioxide (N2O3) is an example of mixed oxide of nitrogen.

Question 28.
NO is paramagnetic in gaseous state but diamagnetic in liquid and solid states – Why ?
Answer:
In gaseous state NO2 exists as a Monomer and contains one unpaired electron but in solid state it dimerises to N2O4 so it doesnot contain unpaired electron.
Hence NO2 is parce magnetic is geseous state but diamagnetic in solid state.

Question 29.
Give an example of
a) acidic oxide of phosphorus
b) neutral oxide of nitrogen.
Answer:
a) P2O5 (or) P4O10, phosphorus pentoxide is an example of acidic oxide of phosphorus
b) Nitrous oxide (N2O) and Nitric oxide (NO) are neutral oxides of nitrogen.

Question 30.
Explain the following
a) reaction of alkali with red phosphorus.
b) reaction between PCl3 and H3PO3.
Answer:
a) Red phosphorus reacts with an alkali to form hypophosphoric acid (H4P2O6)
b) PCl3 undergoes hydrolysis to form H3PO3
PCl3 + 3H2O → H3PO3 + 3HCl

Question 31.
How does PCl3 react with
a) CH3COOH
b) C2H5OH and
c) water.
Answer:
a) PCl3 reacts with CH3COOH and form phosphorous acid, acetyl chloride.
3CH3COOH + PCl3 → 3CH3COCl + H2PO3

b) PCl3 reacts with phosphorous acid and forms phosphorus acid, Ethyl chloride
3C2H5OH + PCl3 → 2C2H5Cl3 + H3PO3

c) PCl3 reacts with water (hydrolysis) to form phosphorus acid. It undergo hydrolysis in presence of moisture.
PCl3 + 3H2O → H3PO3 + 3HCl

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 32.
PCl3 can act as an oxidizing as well as a reducing agent – Justify.
Answer:
PCl3 acts as reducing agent. It is evidented by the following reaction.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 10
PCl3 acts as oxidising agent. It is evidented by the following reaction.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 11

Question 33.
Which of the following are not known ?
PCl3, AsCl3, SbCl3, NCl5, BiCl5, PH5
Answer:
NCl5, BiCl5, PH5 are not known in the given compounds.

Question 34.
Which of the following is more covalent – SbCl5 or SbCl3 ?
Answer:
SbCl5 (Penta halide) is more covalent than SbCl3 (Tri halide). Because Sb in the higher oxidation state exert more polarising power.

Question 35.
Write the oxidation states of phosphorus in solid PCl5.
Answer:

  • In solid state PCl5 exists as an ionic solid [PCl4)+ [PCl6]
  • ‘P’ exhibits +5 oxidation state in [PCl4)+ [PCl6]

Question 36.
Illustrate how copper metal can give different products on reaction with HNO3.
Answer:
Reaction of Cu metal with dilute HNO3.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 12
Reaction of Cu Metal with cone. HNO3
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 13

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 37.
Which oxide of nitrogen has oxidation number of N same as that in nitric acid ?
Answer:

  • In HNO3, ‘N’ has oxidation state +5.
  • Among oxides of nitrogen N2O5 exhibits ‘+5’ oxidation state.

Question 38.
Write the chemical reactions that occur in the manufacture of nitric acid.
Answer:
Chemical reactions involved in the manufacturing of HNO3.

  • Oxidation of NH3
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 14
  • NO2 formation :
    2NO + O2 ⇌ 2NO2
  • Formation of HNO3:
    3NO2 + H2O → 2HNO3 + NO

Question 39.
Iron becomes passive in cone. HNO3 – Why ?
Answer:
Iron becomes passive in cone. HNO3 due to formation of a passive film of oxide on the surface of iron.

Question 40.
Give the uses of
a) nitric acid and
b) ammonia.
Answer:
Use of HNO3:

  • HNO3 is used in the manufacture of ammonium nitrate for fertilisers and other nitrates for use in explosives and pyrotechnics.
  • HNO3 is used in the pickling of stainless steel.
  • HNO3 is used as oxidiser in rocket fuels.

Question 41.
What are the oxidation states of phosphorus in the following ?
i) H3PO3
ii) PCl3
iii) Ca3P2
iv) Na3PO4
v) POF3
Answer:
i) H3PO3
3(1) + x + 3(-3) = 0
x = +3

ii) PCl3
x + 3(-1) = 0
x = 3

iii) Ca3P2
3(+2) + 2x = 0
x = -3

iv) Na3PO4
3(1) + x + 4(-2) = 0
x = +5

v) POF3
x + (-2) + 3(-1) = 0
x = +5

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 42.
H3PO3 is diprotic while H3PO2 is monoprotic – Why ?
Answer:
H3PO3 is diprotic :
Structure of H3PO3:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 15

H3PO2 is monoprotic :
Structure of H3PO2 :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 16

Question 43.
Give the disproportionation reaction of H3PO3.
Answer:
Orthophosphoric acid (H3PO3) on heating disproportionates to give orthophosphoric acid and phosphine.
4H3PO3 → 3H3PO4 + PH3.

Question 44.
H3PO2 is a good reducing agent – Explain with an example.
Answer:
In H3PO2, two H-atoms are bonded directly to P-atom which imparts reducing character to the acid.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 45.
Draw the structures of
a) Hypo phosphoric acid
b) Cyclic meta phosphoric acid.
Answer:
a) Structure of hypo phosphoric acid (H4P2O6) :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 17
b) Structure of cyclic meta phosphoric acid (HPO3)3
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 18

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Discuss the general characteristics of Group – 15 elements with reference to their electronic configuration, oxidation state, atomic size, ionization enthalpy and electronegativity.
Answer:
1) Electronic Configuration : All these elements of this group have s2p3 configuration in their respective outmost orbits.
Nitrogen (N) : [He] 2s22p3; phosphorus (P) : [Ne] 3s23p3, Arsenic (As) : [Ar] 3d104s24p3
Atimony (Sb) : [Kr] 4d10 5s2 5p3 and Bismuth (Bi) = [Xe] 4f14 5d10 6s26p3

2) Oxidation Spates : As per their configurations, these elements may utilize either the three electrons iti the p-orbitals or the five electrons present in both s -and p -orbitals in the exhibition of oxidation states. Consequently, they exhibit common oxidation states +III and +V.

3) Atomic size: In Group-15 elements atomic size increase down the group. A considerable increase in covalent radius observed from N to P and from As to Bi only a small increase in atomic size observed.

4) Ionisation enthalpy : In group – 15 elements ionisation enthalpy decreases down the group due to gradual increase in atomic size.

5) Electronegativity : In group-15 elements electronegativity values decrease down the group with increase in atomic size.

Question 2.
Discuss the trends in chemical reactivity of group – 15 elements.
Answer:
Nitrogen gas exists as diatomic molecule. Dut to the presence of triple bond between Base N – Atoms bond dissociation energy is high (941.4 KJ /mol). Hence nitrogen is inert and unreactive.

Phosphorus is a tetra atomic molecule and P-P single bond is weaker than N ≡ N. P – P bond dissociation energy U 213 KJ/mole. Hence phosphorus is more reactive than Nitrogen.

Explanation :
The single N-N bond is weaker than the single P-P bond due to high inter electronic repulsion of the non-bonding electrons in N2 because of small bond length. There fore the catenation property is weaker in nitrogen as compoud to phosphorares.
R3 P = O exist but R3N = O does not.

Explanation :
Nitrogen does not form dπ – Pπ multiple bond with oxygen because of lack of d – orbitals in Nitrogen atom. But in case of R3N = 0 the value of nitrogen should be 5. So these compounds do not exist where as in case of P’ atom d-orbitals are available. So P-atom can able to form dπ – Pπ multiple bonds hence R3P = 0 exist.

  1. Reactivity towards hydrogen: Group -15 elements forms EH3 type hydrides (E = Group – 15 elements) .
    Eg : PH3, NH3, AsH3, BiH3, SbH3.

    • Among above hydrides NH3 is mild reducing agent while BiH3 is strong reducing agent.
    • Stability of hydrides decreases from NH3 to BiH3.
    • Basicity of hydrides decreases as follows.
      NH3 > PH3 > AsH3 > SbH3 > BiH3.
  2. Reactivity towards Oxygen : These forms two types of oxides E2O3 and E<sub2O5.
    Eg : P2O3 > N2O5, N2O3, P2O5.

    • Acidic character of oxides decrease down the group.
    • E3O3 of N and P are acidic, As and Sb are amphoteric while ‘Bi’ is basic.
  3. Reactivity towards halogens : These elements forms two types of halides EX3 and EX5.
    ‘N’ – does not form penta halides due to lack of the d-orbitals.
    Penta halides are more covalent than tri halides because the elements in higher oxidation state have more polarising power.
  4. Reactivity towards metals : All these elements react with metals to form their binary compounds containing – 3 oxidation state.
    Eg. : Ca3N2, Ca3P2 etc.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 3.
How does P4 react with the following ?
a) SOCl2
b) SO2Cl2
Answer:
a) When P4 reacts with SOCl2 to form phosphorus trichloride.
P4 + 8 SOCl2 → 4 PCl3 + 4 SO2 + 2 S2Cl2
b) When P4 reacts with SOCl2 to form phosphorus pentachloride.
P4 + 10 SOCl2 → 4 PCl5 + 10 SO2

Question 4.
Explain the anomalous nature of nitrogen in group -15.
Answer:
Anomalous properties of Nitrogen : Nitrogen differs from the remaining elements of this group due to its small size, high electronegativity, high ionisation enthalpy and non-availability of d-orbitals.

Nitrogen gas exists as diatomic molecule. Due to the presence of triple bond between base N – Atoms bond dissociation energy is high (941.4 KJ /mol). Hence nitrogen is inert and un-reactive.

Explanation :

  • The single N-N bond is weaker than the single P-P bond due to high inter electronic repulsion of the non-bonding electrons in N2 because of small bond length. Therefore the catenation property is weaker in nitrogen as compound to phosphorus.
  • Nitrogen does not form penta halides due to lack of d-orbitals.
    R3 P = O exist but R3N = O does not.

Explanation :
Nitrogen does not form dπ – Pπ multiple bond with oxygen because of lack of d – orbitals in Nitrogen atom. But in case of R3N = O the value of nitrogen should be 5. So these compounds do not exist where as in case of ‘P atom d-orbitals are available. So P-atom can able to form dπ – Pπ multiple bonds hence R3P = O exist.

Question 5.
Complete the following reactions.
a) Ca3P2 + HaO →
b) P4 + KOH →
c) CuSO4 + NH3
d) Mg + N2
d) (NH4)2 + Cr2O7 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 1
f) Decomposition of nitrous acid →
Answer:
a) Ca3P2 + 6 H2O → 3 Ca(OH)2 + 2PH3
b) P4 + 3 KOH + 3 H2O → PH3 + 3KH2 PO2
c) CuSO4(aq) (blue) + 4NH3 → [Cu (NH3)4] SO4 (deep blue)
d) 3 Mg + N2 → Mg3N2
e) (NH4)2 + Cr2O7 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 1 N2 + 4 H2O + Cr2O3
f) 3HNO2 → HNO3 + 2 NO + H2O

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 6.
How does PCl5 react with the following?
a) Water
b) C2H5OH
c) CH3COOH
d) Ag
Answer:
a) PCl5 undergo hydrolysis to form phosphoric acid.
PCl5 + H2O → POCl3 + 2HCl
POCl3 + 3H2O → H3PO4 + 3 HCl

b) PCl5 reacts with C2H5OH to form Ethyl chloride.
C2H5OH + PCl5 → C2H5Cl + POCl3 + HCl

c) PCl5 reacts with CH3COOH to form acetyl chloride.
CH3COOH + PCl5 → CH3COCl + POCl3 + HCl

d) PCl5 reacts with Ag to form PCl3 and AgCl
PCl5 + 2 Ag → 2 AgCl + PCl3

Question 7.
Complete the following.
a) NH4NO3 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 1
b) HNO3 + P4O10
c) Pb(NO3)2 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 19
d) Zn + dil.HNO3
e) P4 + conc.HNO3
f) HgCl2 + PH3
Answer:
a) NH4NO3 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 1 N2O (Nitrous oxide) + 2 H2O
b) 12 HNO3 + P4O10 → 6 N2O5 + 4 H3PO4
c) 2 Pb(NO3)2 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 1 2 PbO + 4 NO2 + O2
d) 4 Zn + 10 HNO3 (dil) → 4 Zn (NO3)2 + 5 H2O + N2O
e) P4 + 20 HNO3 → 4H3PO4 + 20 NO2 + 4 H2O
f) 3 HgCl2 + 2 PH3 → Hg3P2 + 6 HCl

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
How is ammonia manufactured by Habes process? Explain the reactions of ammonia with [A.P. Mar. 18]
a) ZnSO4(aq)
b) CuSO4(aq)
c) AgCl(s)
Answer:
In Haber process ammonia is directly synthesised from elements (nitrogen and hydrogen). The principle involved in this is
N2 (g) + 3H2O (g) ⇌ 2NH3 + 92.4kJ
This is a reversible exothermic reaction.
According to Le Chatelier’s principle favourable conditions for the better yield of ammonia are low temperature and high pressure. But the optimum conditions are
Temperature : 720k
Pressure : 200 atmospheres
Catalyst : Finely divided iron in the presence of molybdenum (Promoter).
Procedure : A mixture of nitrogen and hydrogen in the volume ratio 1 : 3 is heated to 725 – 775K at a pressure of 200 atmospheres is passed over hot finely divided iron mixed with small amount of molybdenum as promotor. The gases coming out of the catalyst chamber consists of 10 – 20% ammonia gas are cooled and compressed, so that ammonia gas is liquified, and the uncondensed gases are sent for recirculation.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 20
b) Aq.CuSO4 reacts with ammonia to form a deep blue complex,
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 21
c) Solid AgCl reacts with ammonia to form a colourless complex.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 22

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 2.
How is nitric acid manufactured by Ostwald’s process ? How does it react with the following ? [T.S. Mar. 19]
a) Copper
b) Zn
c) S8
d) P4
Answer:
Ostwald’s process : Ammonia, mixed with air in 1 : 7 or 1 : 8, when passed over a hot platinum gauze catalyst, is oxidised to NO mostly (about 95%).
The reaction is
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 23
The liberated heat keeps the catalyst hot. The ‘NO’ is cooled and is mixed with oxygen to give the dioxide, in large empty towers (oxidation chamber). The product is then passed in to warm water, under pressure in the presence of excess of air, to give HNO3.
4NO2 + O2 + 2H2O → 4HNO3.
The acid formed is about 61% concentrated.

a) Copper reacts with dil. HNO3 and cone. HNO3 and liberates Nitric Oxide and Nitrogen dioxide respectively
3 Cu + 5 HNO3 (dil) → 3 Cu (NO3)2 + 2 NO + 4 H2O
Cu + 4 HNO3 (cone.) → Cu (NO3)2 + 2 NO2 + 2 H2O

b) Zn reacts with dil. HNO3 and Cone. HNO3 and liberates Nitrous oxide and Nitrogen dioxide respectively.
4 Zn + 10 HNO3 (dil) → 4 Zn (NO3)2 + 5 H2O + N2O
Zn + 4 HNO3 (cone.) → Zn (NO3)2 + 2 H2 + 2 NO2

c) S8 reacts with cone, nitric acid to form Sulphuric acid, NO2 gas.
S8 + 48 HNO3 → 8 H2SO4 + 48 NO2 + 16 H2O
d) P4 reacts with cone, nitric acid to form phosphoric acid and NO2 gas.
P4 + 20 HNO3 → 4 H3PO4 + 20 NO2 + 4 H2O

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Though nitrogen exhibits +5 oxidation state, it does not form peniahalide. Give reason.
Answer:
Nitrogen with n = 2, has s and p orbitals only. It does not have d orbitals to expand its covalence beyond four. That is why it does not form pentahalide.

Question 2.
PH3 has lower boiling point than NH3. Why ? [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Unlike NH3. PH3 molecules are not associated through hydrogen bonding in liquid state. That is why the boiling point of PH3 is lower than NH3.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 3.
Write the reaction of thermal decomposition of sodium azide.
Answer:
Thermal decomposition of sodium azide gives dinitrogen gas.
2NaN3 → 2Na + 3N2

Question 4.
Why does NH3 act as a Lewis base ?
Answer:
Nitrogen atom in NH3 has one lone pair of electrons with is available for donation. Therefore, it acts as a Lewis base.

Question 5.
Why does NO2 dimerise ?
Answer:
NO2 contains odd number of valence electrons. It be haves as a typical odd molecule. On dimerisation. It is converted to stable N2O4 molecule with even number of electrons.

Question 6.
In what way can it be proved that PH3 is basic in nature ?
Answer:
PH3 reacts with acids like HI to form PH4I which shows that it is basic in nature.
PH3 + HI →PH4I
Due to lone pair on phosphorus atom, PH3 is acting as a Lewis base in the above reaction.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 7.
Why does PCl3 fume in moisture ?
Answer:
PCl3 hydrolyses in the presence of moisture giving fumes of HCl.
PCl3+ 3H2O → H3PO3 + 3HCl

Question 8.
Are all the five bonds in PCl5 molecule equivalent ? Justify your answer.
Answer:
PCl5 has a trigonal bipyramidal structure and the three equatorial P-Cl bonds are equivalent. While the two axial bonds are different and longer than equatorial bonds.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Why are pentahalides more covalent than trihalides ?
Answer:
Higher the positive oxidation state of central atom, more will be its polarising power, which in turn increases the covalent character of the bond formed between the central atom and the halogen atom. In pentahalides, the central atom is in +5 oxidation state while in trihalides, it is in +3 oxidation state. Therefore, pentahalides are more covalent than trihalides.

Question 2.
Why is BiH3 the strongest reducing agent amongst all the hydrides of Group 15 elements ?
Answer:
Among the 15 group elements, the size of Bi atom is largest and hence, the Bi-H bond length is largest or Bi-H bond dissociation energy is lowest. That’s why Bi-H bond dissociates more readily than the other hydrides of the group and hence, BiH3 is the strongest reducing agent.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 3.
Why is N2 less reactive at room temperature ?
Answer:
Dinitrogen is inert of less reactive because the bond enthalpy of N ≡ N bond is very high.

Question 4.
Mention the conditions required to maximise the yield of ammonia.
Answer:
Ammonia is produced by Haber’s process as.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 24
Yield of ammonia is favoured by high pressure according to Le-Chatelier’s principle, Other conditions, that favour the production of ammonia are as follows :

  1. Temperature – approximately 700 K
  2. Pressure – 200 atm or 200 × 105 Pa
  3. Catalyst – Iron oxide
  4. Promotor – Molybdenum of K2O and Al2O3

Question 5.
How does ammonia react with a solution of Cu2+?
Answer:
When ammonia (aqueous solution is ammonium hydroxide) reacts with a solution of Cu2+, a deep blue solution is obtained due to the formation of tetraamine copper (II) ion.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 25

Question 6.
What is the covalence of nitrogen in N2O5?
Answer:
Structural formula of N2O5
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 26
Since, N atom has 4 shared electron pairs; the valence of N is 4.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 7.
Bond angle in PH4+ is higher than that in PH3. Why ?
Answer:
In both PH4+ and PH3, phosphorus atom is sp3 hybridized. In PH4+, all the four orbitals are bonded whereas in PH3, there is a lone pair of electrons too. Due to lone pair-bonded pair repulsion in PH3, the bond angle is less than 109.5°.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 27

Question 8.
What happens when white phosphorus is heated with concentrated NaOH solution in an inert atmosphere of CO2? .
Answer:
White phosphorus dissolves in boiling NaOH in an inert atmosphere of CO2 producing phosphine (PH3) gas and sodium hypophosphite (NaH2PO2).
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 28

Question 9.
What happens when PCl5 is heated ?
Answer:
In PCl3, there are 5P – Cl bonds, out of which three are equatorial (longer) and two are axial (shorter). When PCl5 is heated strongly, two less stable axial bonds break and phosphorus trichloride (PCl3) is formed.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 29
Structure of PCl5 showing axial and equatorial bonds.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 10.
Write a balanced equation for the hydrolytic reaction of PCl5 in heavy water.
Answer:
Reaction of PCl5 in heavy water (D2O)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 30